IIT-JEE 2010 - Career Point

IIT-JEE 2010 - Career Point IIT-JEE 2010 - Career Point

careerpoint.ac.in
from careerpoint.ac.in More from this publisher
20.11.2014 Views

Volume - 5 Issue - 6<br />

December, 2009 (Monthly Magazine)<br />

Editorial / Mailing Office :<br />

112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.) 324009<br />

Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000<br />

e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com<br />

Editor :<br />

Pramod Maheshwari<br />

[B.Tech. <strong>IIT</strong>-Delhi]<br />

Analyst & Correspondent<br />

Mr. Ajay Jain<br />

Cover Design & Layout<br />

Mohammed Rafiq<br />

Om Gocher, Govind Saini<br />

Circulation & Advertisement<br />

Ankesh Jain, Praveen Chandna<br />

Ph (0744)- 3040007, 9001799502<br />

Subscription<br />

Sudha Jaisingh Ph. 0744-2500492, 2500692<br />

© Strictly reserved with the publishers<br />

• No Portion of the magazine can be<br />

published/ reproduced without the written<br />

permission of the publisher<br />

• All disputes are subject to the exclusive<br />

jurisdiction of the Kota Courts only.<br />

Every effort has been made to avoid errors or<br />

omission in this publication. In spite of this, errors<br />

are possible. Any mistake, error or discrepancy<br />

noted may be brought to our notice which shall be<br />

taken care of in the forthcoming edition, hence any<br />

suggestion is welcome. It is notified that neither the<br />

publisher nor the author or seller will be<br />

responsible for any damage or loss of action to any<br />

one, of any kind, in any manner, there from.<br />

Unit Price Rs. 20/-<br />

Special Subscription Rates<br />

6 issues : Rs. 100 /- [One issue free ]<br />

12 issues : Rs. 200 /- [Two issues free]<br />

24 issues : Rs. 400 /- [Four issues free]<br />

Owned & Published by Pramod Maheshwari,<br />

112, Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota & Printed<br />

by Naval Maheshwari, Published & Printed at<br />

112, Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.<br />

Editor : Pramod Maheshwari<br />

Dear Students,<br />

All of us want to get organized. The first thing in getting organized is to<br />

find our obstacles and conquer them. Make a beginning by conquering<br />

obstacles for starting in right earnest.<br />

Sometimes the quest for perfectionism holds us back. We occasionally<br />

feel that we should start when we have enough time to do a job<br />

thoroughly. One way to tackle this kind of mindset is to choose<br />

smaller projects or parts of projects that can be completed within 15<br />

minutes to one hour or less. It is important to keep yourself<br />

motivated. Approach your projects as something which are going to<br />

give you pleasure and fun. Reward yourself for all that you accomplish<br />

no matter how small they may be. Never hesitate to ask for help from<br />

a friend. Make all efforts to keep your motivational level high. You<br />

might feel overwhelmed because you are focusing on every trivial thing<br />

that needs to be got done.<br />

How do you act or react to your life? When you are merely reacting<br />

to events in your life, you are putting yourself in a weak position. You<br />

are only waiting for things to happen in order to take the next step in<br />

your life. On the other hand when you are enthusiastic about your<br />

happiness you facilitate great things to happen. It is always better to act<br />

from a position of power. Never be a passive victim of life. Be<br />

someone who steers his life in exactly the direction he wants it to go.<br />

It is all upto you now.<br />

If you do what you have always done and in the way you have done it<br />

you shall get only such results which you have always got. Getting<br />

organized requires that not doing things that cause clutter, waste of<br />

time and hurt your chances adversely of realizing your goals. You<br />

should concentrate only on doing things that eliminate clutter, waste of<br />

times and hurt your chances adversely of realizing your goals. You<br />

should concentrate only on doing things that eliminate clutter, increase<br />

your productivity and provide the best chance for achieving your goals.<br />

The first step should be to stop leaving papers and other things on<br />

tables, desks, counter tops and in all kind of odd place. The more<br />

things you leave around in places other than rightful places the quicker<br />

the clutter will accumulate. Keep things in their assigned places after<br />

you have finished using them. It does not take along to put something<br />

away. If you leave things lying around they will build into a mountain of<br />

clutter. It could take hours if not weeks or months to trace them and<br />

declutter the atmosphere.<br />

Presenting forever positive ideas to your success.<br />

Yours truly<br />

Pramod Maheshwari,<br />

B.Tech., <strong>IIT</strong> Delhi<br />

If you can't make a mistake,<br />

you can't make anything.<br />

Editorial<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 1 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2 DECEMBER 2009


Volume-5 Issue-6<br />

December, 2009 (Monthly Magazine)<br />

NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS<br />

Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>.<br />

INDEX<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Regulars ..........<br />

PAGE<br />

Know <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> With 15 Best Questions of <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Challenging Problems in Physics, Chemistry & Maths<br />

Much more <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> News.<br />

Xtra Edge Test Series for <strong>JEE</strong>-<strong>2010</strong> & 2011<br />

NEWS ARTICLE 4<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-Jodhpur to begin functioning from<br />

February - March <strong>2010</strong><br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-K students develop autonomous vehicle<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>ian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 8<br />

Dr. Rajeewa Arya<br />

KNOW <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 10<br />

Previous <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Question<br />

Study Time........<br />

S<br />

Success Tips for the Month<br />

• The greatest adventure is what lies ahead.<br />

• Fixers believe they can fix. Complainers<br />

believe they can complain. They are both<br />

right.<br />

• The tire model for motivation: People<br />

work best at the right pressure.<br />

• Trust the force, Luke.<br />

• Use your feelings or your feelings will use<br />

you.<br />

• People who expect to fail are usually right.<br />

• The path to success is paved with<br />

mistakes.<br />

• You've got to cross that lonesome valley.<br />

You've got to cross it by yourself.<br />

• Appreciate what your brain does. In case<br />

nobody else does.<br />

• Learn to mock the woe-mongers.<br />

• Be confident. Even if you are not, pretend<br />

to be. No one can tell the difference.<br />

DYNAMIC PHYSICS 18<br />

8-Challenging Problems [Set# 8]<br />

Students’ Forum<br />

Physics Fundamentals<br />

Reflection at plane & curved surfaces<br />

Fluid Mechanics<br />

CATALYST CHEMISTRY 35<br />

Key Concept<br />

Carboxylic Acid<br />

Chemical Kinetics<br />

Understanding : Inorganic Chemistry<br />

DICEY MATHS 46<br />

Mathematical Challenges<br />

Students’ Forum<br />

Key Concept<br />

Monotonicity, Maxima & Minima<br />

Function<br />

Test Time ..........<br />

XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 58<br />

Class XII – <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong> Paper<br />

Class XII – <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011 Paper<br />

Mock Test CBSE Pattern Paper -1 [Class # XII]<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 3 DECEMBER 2009


<strong>IIT</strong>-Jodhpur to begin<br />

functioning from February<br />

- March <strong>2010</strong><br />

Indian Institute of Technology in<br />

Rajasthan is all set to begin<br />

functioning from the MBM<br />

Engineering College, here from<br />

next academic session<br />

commencing in February-March<br />

<strong>2010</strong>.<br />

The decision to this effect was<br />

made after the visit of a central<br />

team headed by additional<br />

secretary, ministry of Human<br />

Resource Development, Ashok<br />

Thakur during recent visit to<br />

different sites, which included the<br />

sites proposed for the<br />

construction of the <strong>IIT</strong>-Jodhpur<br />

and the existing engineering<br />

college of the city.<br />

So, if everything goes well, the<br />

next session of <strong>IIT</strong>-J, which is<br />

presently being run from the <strong>IIT</strong>-<br />

Kanpur campus, will start<br />

functioning from the campus of<br />

this college here.<br />

Thakur, who himself approved the<br />

MBM college during a visit on<br />

Saturday, said, "The final decision<br />

is to be taken by the ministry, to<br />

whom we will submit the report<br />

in a 2-3 days."<br />

Agarwal, who was quite ecstatic<br />

following the visit of the team,<br />

expressed hope that the next<br />

session of the <strong>IIT</strong> will start here<br />

from February–March <strong>2010</strong>.<br />

He added that the new building of<br />

the <strong>IIT</strong> will take atleast 2-3 years,<br />

but owing to repeated reminders<br />

by <strong>IIT</strong>-Kanpur citing its inability to<br />

continue running the session of<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-J from its own campus, there is<br />

a growing pressure to shift it to<br />

Jodhpur.<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-K students develop<br />

autonomous vehicle<br />

True to its reputation of being<br />

ahead in technological<br />

developments, the Indian Institute<br />

of Technology, Kanpur, in<br />

collaboration with the Boeing<br />

Company is all set to unveil a new<br />

autonomous vehicle `Abhyast' as<br />

part of its Golden Jubilee<br />

celebrations.<br />

Prof Shantanu Bhattacharya,<br />

faculty in mechanical engineering<br />

department of <strong>IIT</strong>-K and coordinator<br />

of the project, while<br />

talking to TOI said, "The vehicle<br />

will set new landmarks in terms of<br />

applied robotics research. Besides<br />

being unique, it will probably be<br />

one of its kind in India. Such<br />

vehicles play important role in<br />

defence applications and disaster<br />

management plans." He added that<br />

quite a few modules of such<br />

vehicles have already been<br />

developed by the United States<br />

and some other countries. But,<br />

India has so far not produced<br />

vehicles of this nature.<br />

Further, Prof Bhattacharya<br />

informed, `Abhyast' will serve as a<br />

first running prototype for such<br />

vehicles in the country. "It has a<br />

very small footprint -- 30x30x15<br />

cm -- and thus it can be easily<br />

carried by soldiers and relief<br />

workers for disaster management<br />

operations. This technology was<br />

widely used by the US in<br />

investigating the World Trade<br />

Centre attack as well as in the war<br />

zones of Afghanistan and Iraq," he<br />

added.<br />

Earlier this year, as a part of its<br />

University relations programme,<br />

Boeing decided to actively<br />

collaborate with <strong>IIT</strong>-K to foster<br />

research and innovation among<br />

undergraduate students. As part of<br />

this endeavour, eight students of<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-K -- Abhilash Jindal, Ankur Jain,<br />

Faiz Ahmed, Gaurav Dhama,<br />

Palash Soni, Shishir Pandya and<br />

Sriram Ganesan -- were selected<br />

by Prof Bhattacharya to work on<br />

the project. "My role was mainly<br />

confined to that of a mentor.<br />

`Abhyast' in fact the result of<br />

students' labour and skills and<br />

should serve as an inspiration for<br />

other students," said a beaming<br />

Prof Bhattacharya.<br />

`Abhyast' is a fully autonomous<br />

vehicle capable of navigating in<br />

unstructured and unknown<br />

environments. The user needs to<br />

specify only the end coordinates<br />

where he wants the vehicle to<br />

reach, and the task of reaching<br />

there would be taken by the<br />

vehicle itself, requiring no<br />

intervention by the user. The<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 4 DECEMBER 2009


vehicle is equipped with high end<br />

sensors like GPS, IMU and<br />

SONARS to navigate and avoid<br />

obstacles in its vicinity. The vehicle<br />

has a tank like chassis design that<br />

allows it to move even on uneven<br />

and slippery terrain, thus making it<br />

a robust vehicle for warlike and<br />

other disastrous situations.<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> forecast system for<br />

Oman, Maldives<br />

Ocean State Forecasting System<br />

(OSFS), a technology developed by<br />

Indian Institute of Technology,<br />

Kharagpur, will now be adopted<br />

by Oman and Maldives. The<br />

World Meteorological Organisation<br />

(WMO) feels that OSFS should be<br />

immediately adopted by other<br />

nations that have sea coasts.<br />

The system, that will continuously<br />

measure height, direction and<br />

period of waves, will help shipping<br />

and navigation.<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-Kgp was given the prestigious<br />

project jointly by the union<br />

ministry of ocean development<br />

and the department of science and<br />

technology.<br />

It was headed by the institute's<br />

former director, S K Dubey.<br />

The model was developed by the<br />

department of ocean engineering<br />

and naval architecture. It was<br />

completed about a year ago and<br />

handed over to the India<br />

Meteorological Department by the<br />

institute for adoption. Dubey is<br />

presently in <strong>IIT</strong> Delhi to<br />

coordinate the project.<br />

"WMO was so impressed that it<br />

immediately referred the<br />

technology to all the coastal<br />

nations. But it cannot be<br />

transferred without proper<br />

training to end users, so we will<br />

be training meteorologists from<br />

other countries in batches. This<br />

will start with Oman and Maldives.<br />

Their scientists will be on the<br />

campus for an intensive training,"<br />

Dubey said.<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>s come up with their RTI<br />

'shield'<br />

Stung by the exposure of<br />

admission anomalies in recent<br />

years, the <strong>IIT</strong> system has come up<br />

with an innovative method of<br />

blocking transparency even as it<br />

agreed to give data under RTI on<br />

the marks obtained by the four<br />

lakh candidates in this year’s joint<br />

entrance examination (<strong>JEE</strong>). It<br />

insisted on giving the data only in<br />

the hard copy running into<br />

hundreds of thousands of pages<br />

rather than in the more<br />

convenient form of a CD.<br />

The information seeker, Rajeev<br />

Kumar, a computer science<br />

professor in <strong>IIT</strong> Kharagpur, is<br />

crying foul. For, the hard copy<br />

would not only result in a steep<br />

increase in the cost of information<br />

(running into six figures) but also<br />

make it almost impossible for him<br />

to detect irregularities in the latest<br />

<strong>JEE</strong> as he did in the three previous<br />

ones by analyzing the electronic<br />

data that had then by given to him<br />

under RTI.<br />

As a result of this change in the<br />

strategy of the <strong>IIT</strong> system, central<br />

information commissioner Shailesh<br />

Gandhi fixed a hearing for<br />

November 6 specially to resolve<br />

this soft vs hard debate. The<br />

hearing follows the unusual<br />

reasons given by Gautam Barua,<br />

director of <strong>IIT</strong> Guwahati and<br />

overall in-charge of <strong>JEE</strong> 2009, for<br />

his failure to comply with the<br />

CIC’s disclosure direction passed<br />

on July 30.<br />

In his first mail to CIC on October<br />

2, Barua said that as there were a<br />

number of RTI applications<br />

seeking the CD, “we are<br />

apprehensive that this request for<br />

electronic data is to profit from it<br />

by using it for <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> coaching<br />

purposes (planning, targeting<br />

particular cities, population<br />

segments, etc).”<br />

The reference to the coaching<br />

institutes is reminiscent of the<br />

recent controversy over the move<br />

to raise the bar on 12th class<br />

marks to be eligible for <strong>IIT</strong><br />

selection.<br />

Asserting that <strong>IIT</strong>s had “nothing to<br />

hide regarding the results”, Barua<br />

said, “We are ready to show the<br />

running of the software with the<br />

original data to the CIC, if it so<br />

desires.”<br />

As a corollary, Barua made an<br />

issue of the fact that Kumar “has<br />

not asked to see the data, but he<br />

wants an electronic version<br />

delivered to him. Why is this so?”<br />

Kumar responded to that by<br />

pointing out that the irregularities<br />

he had uncovered in the <strong>JEE</strong> of the<br />

previous three years was on the<br />

basis of “compute intensive<br />

scientific calculations and analysis,<br />

which could not have been done<br />

just by looking at the data.”<br />

Barua’s explanation in his<br />

subsequent mail on October 3 is:<br />

“By seeing, I meant that the<br />

appellant could come to <strong>IIT</strong><br />

Guwahati and view the data, see<br />

the software being run, etc.” He<br />

added that if this option was<br />

unacceptable to CIC, “we will<br />

wish to provide the data in hard<br />

copy form, the costs of printing<br />

having to be borne by the<br />

appellant.”<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 5 DECEMBER 2009


If Kumar is pressing that the data<br />

be given to him “in the form in<br />

which it is originally available”, it is<br />

because the access to the<br />

electronic data of the previous<br />

three years helped him unearth,<br />

for instance, the shocking fact that<br />

general category candidates got<br />

into <strong>IIT</strong>s after scoring in <strong>JEE</strong> as<br />

little as little as 5% in Physics and<br />

6% in Mathematics.<br />

Kerala seeks second <strong>IIT</strong><br />

report on record<br />

Kerala has filed an application in<br />

the apex court urging it to take on<br />

record the second part of the<br />

report titled Seismic Stability of<br />

Mullaiperiyar Composite Dam,<br />

submitted by D K Paul, Professor<br />

of earthquake engineering<br />

department, Indian Institute of<br />

Technology, Roorkee.<br />

The first part of the report<br />

Structural Stability of Mullaiperiyar<br />

Dam Considering Seismic Effects<br />

— Part I — Seismic Hazard<br />

Assessment was submitted by <strong>IIT</strong>-<br />

Roorkee in May 2008. The said<br />

report is already before the apex<br />

court, it averred.<br />

Kerala would like to file the<br />

second part of the report in<br />

support of its argument that<br />

Mullaiperiyar dam is not safe for<br />

storage, the application stated.<br />

The report stated that the<br />

earthquake safety of old concrete<br />

or masonry gravity dams under<br />

moderate to strong ground<br />

motions is of great concern.<br />

Although there is no evidence of<br />

catastrophic failure of gravity<br />

dams, yet the possibility of tensile<br />

cracking is never ruled out.<br />

The finite element analysis of dam<br />

subjected to static and seismic<br />

loading shows tensile stresses at<br />

the heel of dam-foundation<br />

interface, the report indicated.<br />

“The Mullaiperiyar dam is a<br />

composite gravity dam built during<br />

1887-1895. The front and rear<br />

faces of the dam were built with<br />

un-coursed rubble masonry in<br />

lime surkhi mortar. The hearting is<br />

constructed of lime surkhi<br />

concrete. It lies in seismic zone III<br />

as per seismic zoning map of India.<br />

The 176 feet-high composite<br />

gravity dam is now over 114 years<br />

old,” the report went on to say.<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>s want to be accredited<br />

by statutory body<br />

As the government wants to make<br />

accreditation mandatory for all<br />

institutions, the <strong>IIT</strong>s have said they<br />

would like to be accredited by a<br />

statutory body and not by the<br />

National Board of Accreditation<br />

(NBA).<br />

The <strong>IIT</strong> directors have told the<br />

government that they have no<br />

objection to accreditation of the<br />

institutes, but insisted that the<br />

accreditation agency should be a<br />

statutory and autonomous<br />

organisation.<br />

They expressed these views at the<br />

meeting of the <strong>IIT</strong> Council, the<br />

highest decision making body for<br />

the <strong>IIT</strong>s, held here last month.<br />

HRD Minister Kapil Sibal, who is<br />

the chairman of the council, told<br />

them that the government would<br />

set up an accreditation agency by<br />

introducing a bill in the Parliament<br />

soon.<br />

"The directors said the<br />

accreditation should be conducted<br />

by a statutory body<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>s told to reveal<br />

candidate details<br />

The Central Information<br />

Commission has ordered the <strong>IIT</strong>s<br />

to disclose most details of<br />

candidates who sat the 2009<br />

entrance examination, rejecting<br />

the institutes’ argument that<br />

revealing candidates’ names would<br />

be a breach of their privacy.<br />

India’s apex watchdog for the<br />

Right to Information Act has<br />

ordered the <strong>IIT</strong>s to reveal the<br />

names, addresses, pin codes and<br />

marks of all students who<br />

appeared in the Joint Entrance<br />

Examination this year.<br />

In its November 6 order, the<br />

commission asked <strong>IIT</strong> Guwahati,<br />

the chief organiser among the <strong>IIT</strong>s<br />

of the 2009 examination, to<br />

disclose by November 25 the<br />

information sought by the<br />

appellant.<br />

The order follows efforts by the<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> to withhold information on<br />

candidates who appeared in the<br />

2009 <strong>JEE</strong> despite earlier orders<br />

mandating the release of similar<br />

data on <strong>IIT</strong> candidates over the<br />

past three years.<br />

The order is significant because a<br />

similar disclosure in 2006 revealed<br />

discrepancies between cutoff<br />

marks used by the <strong>IIT</strong>s that year<br />

and the cutoffs arrived at by using<br />

the formula the institutes claimed<br />

to have used.<br />

At least 994 students, who cleared<br />

the cutoffs arrived at by using the<br />

formula the <strong>IIT</strong>s claimed to have<br />

used, were denied admission<br />

because the institutes used<br />

different cutoffs.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 6 DECEMBER 2009


The <strong>IIT</strong>s have till now been unable<br />

to explain how they arrived at the<br />

cutoffs — by using the formula<br />

they claim to have used.<br />

The appellant in the 2009 case is<br />

the parent of a student who<br />

appeared in the controversial<br />

2006 examination and is trying to<br />

use the RTI Act to ensure that the<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>s do not repeat their errors.<br />

The <strong>IIT</strong>s, in the 2009 case, argued<br />

that the release of candidate<br />

details sought by the appellant<br />

could compromise the privacy of<br />

these candidates.<br />

The appellant had sought the<br />

registration numbers, names,<br />

gender, parents’ names, pin codes<br />

and marks in physics, chemistry<br />

and mathematics of all students<br />

who appeared in the 2009<br />

examination.<br />

The appellant has expressed<br />

concern that the <strong>IIT</strong>s may be<br />

admitting the children of institute<br />

administrators or certain faculty<br />

members despite poor marks, and<br />

has argued that details he has<br />

sought would help clarify his<br />

doubts.<br />

The commission, in its order, has<br />

argued that while providing email<br />

addresses and mobile phone<br />

numbers of candidates would<br />

constitute a violation of privacy,<br />

merely disclosing their names and<br />

addresses would not.<br />

Open source software<br />

needs marketing<br />

PUNE: There is a need for greater<br />

promotion of the use of open<br />

source software for information<br />

and communication technology<br />

(ICT)-based teaching and learning.<br />

Professor Kannan M Moudgalya of<br />

the Indian Institute of Technology,<br />

Bombay (<strong>IIT</strong>-B), highlighted this on<br />

Monday. Moudgalya, who heads<br />

the Centre for Distance<br />

Engineering Education Programme<br />

(CDEEP) at the <strong>IIT</strong>, was delivering<br />

the keynote address at the launch<br />

of k<strong>Point</strong>, a software solution for<br />

interactive learning and training.<br />

k<strong>Point</strong>, developed by city-based<br />

Great Software Laboratory (GSL),<br />

was launched by noted computer<br />

expert Vijay Bhatkar, creator of<br />

India's Param series of<br />

supercomputers. Heads and<br />

professionals from leading IT<br />

companies as well as principals of<br />

engineering institutions were<br />

present at the occasion.<br />

Open source software refers to<br />

computer software provided<br />

under a license that is in the public<br />

domain. "Open source software<br />

has a distinct cost advantage over<br />

the expensive commercial<br />

software packages. However, a<br />

considerable marketing effort is<br />

required to secure a greater and<br />

wider audience of students for<br />

courses transmitted live using ICT<br />

tools based on open source<br />

software," Moudgalya said.<br />

"Open source software is often<br />

sufficient in most distance<br />

education programmes, except for<br />

some niche academic segments.<br />

However, academic institutions<br />

don't train students in using good<br />

open source software," he further<br />

stated.<br />

Moudgalya gave an overview of<br />

the CDEEP's involvement in the<br />

Talk to teacher' programme,<br />

which is funded by the Union<br />

human resource development<br />

ministry and aims to train students<br />

as well as teachers in higher<br />

education. <strong>IIT</strong>-B started<br />

disseminating its courses live on<br />

the internet nearly a decade ago.<br />

For the last two years, he stated,<br />

the CDEEP has been using the<br />

education satellite Edusat,<br />

provided by the Indian Space<br />

Research Organisation, and has<br />

raised a network of 75 centres for<br />

transmission of live courses.<br />

In his brief address, Bhatkar made<br />

out a strong case for Indian ICT<br />

professionals acknowledging and<br />

adopting technologies and<br />

innovations<br />

developed<br />

indigenously.<br />

Sunil Gaitonde, chief executive of<br />

GSL, said, "Technology must<br />

bridge the gap between the<br />

growing number of learners and<br />

lesser number of teachers. The<br />

prevailing knowledge economy<br />

needs highly skilled workers and<br />

the existing faculty crunch can be<br />

tackled only through apt use of<br />

technology."<br />

Gaitonde said: "Factors like<br />

grassroots videos, collaborations,<br />

mobile broadband, data mash-ups,<br />

collective intelligence and social<br />

operating systems are bound to<br />

make a sea change in the way<br />

education is delivered."<br />

College of Engineering, Pune<br />

(CoEP) principal Anil<br />

Sahasrabudhe, Vishwakarma<br />

Institute of Technology<br />

principal Hemant Abhyankar,<br />

Persistent Systems chief<br />

Anand Deshpande and founder-<br />

CEO of music education<br />

web portal ShadjaMadhyam,<br />

Nandu Kulkarni, were<br />

among those present at the<br />

event.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 7 DECEMBER 2009


Success Story<br />

This article contains story of a person who get succeed after graduation from different <strong>IIT</strong>'s<br />

Dr. Rajeewa Arya<br />

B.E., M.E.(<strong>IIT</strong> – Kanpur)<br />

Chief Executive Officer, Moser Bear (I), Ltd.<br />

Dr. Rajeewa (Rajiv) Arya, M. Tech., Ph. D is presently<br />

the Chief Executive Officer l at Moserbaer Photovoltaic<br />

(MBPV) in New Delhi, India. He was previously the COO<br />

& CTO for the Thin Film Vertical. He joined MBPV as a<br />

Senior Vice-President & CTO (Thin Film) in September,<br />

2007. and Electrical Engineers (IEEE) and the Materials<br />

Research Society (MRS). Prior to that Dr. Arya was a<br />

founder, Vice-President and CTO at Optisolar (previously<br />

called Gen3Solar) in Hayward, California. Before founding<br />

Gen3solar, he was the Director of Oregon Renewable<br />

Energy Center (OREC), an academic/research center at<br />

the Oregon Institute of Technology (OIT).<br />

Dr. Arya launched Arya International, Inc., a Solar<br />

Technology and Business Consulting firm, in 2003. Prior<br />

to that Dr. Arya worked at Solarex/ BPSolar for 19 years<br />

in various capacities, from Scientist to Executive Director,<br />

thin-film technology.<br />

He has over 25 years experience in thin-film solar cells<br />

and modules. His R&D activities have centered on<br />

material and device aspects of three types of thin-film<br />

solar cells and modules – amorphous silicon, copperindium-diselenide,<br />

and cadmium telluride. His work<br />

includes product design, process scale-up, process<br />

transfer, piloting and start-up of a thin-film solar module<br />

plant. He has maintained a professional interest in many<br />

aspects of renewable energy components and systems.<br />

Dr. Arya holds a Masters of Science degree in Solid-State<br />

Physics from Jadavpur University, Calcutta, India and a<br />

Master of Technology degree in Material Science from the<br />

Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur, India. He obtained<br />

his Ph.D. in Engineering from Brown University, Rhode<br />

Island, in 1983. He has extensive management training in<br />

Total Quality Management, Finance, Project management,<br />

and Technology Innovation Management.<br />

Dr. Arya has authored and co-authored over 100<br />

technical papers and holds 6 U.S. Patents. He is the<br />

recipient of the “Outstanding Paper Award” at the 7th<br />

PVSEC, the “Team of the Year” award from Solarex<br />

Quality Process, and his group received an R&D 100<br />

award for the Power view Product. He chaired the<br />

Program Committee for the 29th IEEE Photovoltaic<br />

Specialists Conference in 2002. He is a member of the<br />

Institute of Electronics.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 8 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 9 DECEMBER 2009


KNOW <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

By Previous Exam Questions<br />

PHYSICS<br />

1. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is<br />

placed horizontally on a rough surface. A block of<br />

mass 1 kg is placed as shown. The co-efficient of<br />

friction in contact is µ = 2/5. The disc has an<br />

acceleration of 25 m/s 2 towards left. Find the<br />

acceleration of the block with respect to disc. Given<br />

cos θ = 4/5, sin θ = 3/5.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-2006]<br />

25 m/s 2<br />

Sol. Applying pseudo force ma and resolving it. Applying<br />

F net = ma x for x-direction<br />

ma cos θ – (f 1 + f 2 + = ma x<br />

ma cos θ – µN 1 – µN 2 = ma x<br />

ma cos θ – µma sin θ – µmg = ma x<br />

⇒ a x = a cos θ – µa sin θ – µg<br />

= 25 × 5<br />

4 – 5<br />

2 × 25 × 5<br />

3 – 5<br />

2 × 10 = 10 m/s<br />

2<br />

2. A wooden stick of length L, radius R and density ρ<br />

has a small metal piece of mass m (of negligible<br />

volume) attached to its one end. Find the minimum<br />

value for the mass m (in terms of given parameters)<br />

that would make the stick float vertically in<br />

equilibrium in liquid of density σ(>p). [<strong>IIT</strong>-1999]<br />

Sol. For the wooden stick-mass system to be in stable<br />

equilibrium the centre of gravity of stick-mass system<br />

should be lower than the centre of buoyancy. Also in<br />

equilibrium the centre of gravity (G) and the centre of<br />

buoyancy (B) lie in the same vertical axis.<br />

The above condition 1 will be satisfied if the mass is<br />

towards the lower side of the stick as shown in the<br />

figure.<br />

The two forces will create a torque which will bring<br />

the stick-mass system in the vertical position of the<br />

stable equilibrium<br />

Let l be the length of the stick immersed in the<br />

liquid.<br />

θ<br />

Then<br />

F B =πR 2 hσg<br />

θ<br />

mg<br />

h/2<br />

L/2<br />

θ<br />

OB = 2<br />

l . Let OG = y<br />

For vertical equilibrium<br />

F G = F B<br />

⇒ (M + m)g = F B<br />

⇒ πR 2 Lρg + mg = πR 2 l σ g<br />

2<br />

C<br />

(πR 2 Lρ)g<br />

πR<br />

Lρ + m<br />

l =<br />

...(1)<br />

2<br />

πR<br />

σ<br />

Now using the concept of centre of mass to find y.<br />

Then<br />

My1<br />

+ my2<br />

y =<br />

M + n<br />

Since mass m is at O the origin, therefore y 2 = 0<br />

M(L / 2) + m×<br />

O ML<br />

∴ y =<br />

=<br />

M + m 2(M + m)<br />

2<br />

( πR<br />

Lρ)L<br />

=<br />

2<br />

2( πR<br />

Lρ + m)<br />

Therefore for stable equilibrium<br />

l > y<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

πR<br />

Lρ + m ( πR<br />

Lρ)L<br />

∴<br />

><br />

2<br />

2<br />

2( πR<br />

σ)<br />

2( πR<br />

Lρ + m)<br />

⇒ m ≥ π R 2 L ( ρσ – ρ)<br />

...(2)<br />

∴ minimum value of m is πr 2 L ( ρσ – ρ)<br />

3. A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel of volume V<br />

consists of one mole of a gas A with λ (=C p /C v ) = 5/3<br />

and another gas B with λ = 7/5 at a certain<br />

temperature T. The relative molar masses of the gases<br />

A and B are 4 and 32, respectively. The gases A and<br />

B do not react with each other and are assumed to be<br />

ideal. The gaseous mixture follows the equation<br />

PV 19/13 = constant, in adiabatic processes. [<strong>IIT</strong>-1995]<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 10 DECEMBER 2009


(a) Find the number of moles of the gas B in the<br />

gaseous mixture.<br />

(b) Compute the speed of sound in the gaseous<br />

mixture at T = 300 K.<br />

(c) If T is raised by 1 K from 300 K, find the %<br />

change in the speed of sound in the gaseous mixture.<br />

(d) The mixture is compressed adiabatically to 1/5 of<br />

its initial volume V. Find the change in its adiabatic<br />

compressibility in terms of the given quantities.<br />

Sol. (a) The ratio of specific heat of mixture of gases<br />

(C p ) m<br />

γ m =<br />

* m stands for mixture.<br />

(Cv<br />

) m<br />

n ACpA<br />

+ n BCpB<br />

Also (C p ) m =<br />

n A + n B<br />

n ACVA<br />

+ n BCvB<br />

and (C v ) m =<br />

n A + n B<br />

Also according to Mayer's relationship<br />

C p – C v = R<br />

C p R R R<br />

⇒ – 1 = ⇒ γ – 1 = ⇒ Cv =<br />

Cv<br />

Cv<br />

Cv<br />

γ −1<br />

R<br />

For Gas A (C v ) A =<br />

5 /3 − 1<br />

= 3R<br />

2<br />

3R 5R<br />

∴ (C p ) A = R + (C v ) A = R + =<br />

2 2<br />

R<br />

For Gas B (C v ) B =<br />

7 /5 − 1<br />

= 5R<br />

2<br />

5R 7R<br />

∴ (C p ) B = R + =<br />

2 2<br />

(C p ) m n ACpA<br />

+ n BCpB<br />

γ m = =<br />

(Cv<br />

) m n ACvA<br />

+ n BCvB<br />

1×<br />

(5R / 2) + n B(7R / 2) 5 + 7n B<br />

=<br />

=<br />

1×<br />

(3R / 2) + n B (5R / 2) 3+<br />

5n B<br />

According to the relationship<br />

PV 19/13 = constant we get γ m = 19/13<br />

5 + 7n B 19<br />

∴ = ⇒ nB = 2 mol.<br />

3+<br />

5n B 13<br />

Alternatively we may use the following formula<br />

n1<br />

n1<br />

n 2<br />

= +<br />

γ m −1<br />

γ1<br />

−1<br />

γ 2 −1<br />

where γ m = Ratio of specific heats of mixture<br />

(b) We know that velocity of sound in air is given by<br />

the relationship<br />

v =<br />

γP<br />

d<br />

m<br />

where d = density = v<br />

Also, PV = (n A + n B )RT<br />

⇒<br />

( n A n B)<br />

PV =<br />

RT<br />

V<br />

∴ v =<br />

γ( n A + n B )RT<br />

m<br />

V ×<br />

V<br />

=<br />

γ ( n A + n B )RT<br />

m<br />

Mass of the gas,<br />

m = n A M A + n B M B = 1 × 4 + 2 × 32<br />

= 68 g/mol mol = 0.068 kg/mol<br />

19(1 + 2) × 8.314×<br />

300<br />

∴ v =<br />

= 400.03 ms –1<br />

13×<br />

0.068<br />

(c) We know that the velocity of sound<br />

⇒<br />

v =<br />

γP<br />

d<br />

v + ∆v<br />

v<br />

=<br />

=<br />

γRT<br />

M<br />

T + ∆T<br />

T<br />

∆ v 1<br />

⇒ 1 + = 1 + v 2<br />

and v + ∆v =<br />

⎛1+<br />

∆T<br />

⎞<br />

= ⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ T ⎠<br />

∆T<br />

T<br />

∆ T


4. A square loop of side 'a' with a capacitor of capacitance<br />

C is located between two current carrying<br />

long parallel wires as shown. The value of I in the<br />

wires is given as I = I 0 sin ωt. [<strong>IIT</strong>-2003]<br />

a<br />

a<br />

I<br />

I<br />

a<br />

(a) Calculate maximum current in the square loop.<br />

(b) Draw a graph between charges on the upper plate<br />

of the capacitor vs time.<br />

Sol. (a) Let us consider a small strip of thickness dx as<br />

shown in the figure.<br />

The magnetic field at this strip<br />

B = B A + B B (Perpendicular to the plane of<br />

paper directed upwards)<br />

µ 0 I µ<br />

= +<br />

0 I<br />

2 π x 2 π (3a − x)<br />

B A = Magnetic field due to current in wire A<br />

µ 0<br />

= I ⎡1<br />

1 ⎤<br />

2 π<br />

⎢ + ⎥<br />

⎣x<br />

3a − x ⎦<br />

B B = Magnetic field due to current in wire B<br />

dx<br />

I<br />

x<br />

Small amount of magnetic flux passing through<br />

the strip of thickness dx is<br />

dφ = B × adx<br />

µ 0 Ia×<br />

3a dx<br />

=<br />

2πx (3a − x)<br />

Total flux through the square loop<br />

2a<br />

2<br />

µ ×<br />

φ =<br />

0 I 3a dx µ 0 Ia<br />

∫<br />

= ln 2<br />

a 2π<br />

x(3a − x) π<br />

µ 0 a ln(2)<br />

= (I 0 sin ωt)<br />

π<br />

The emf produced<br />

dφ µ 0<br />

e = − =<br />

aI 0 ω ln(2) cos ωt<br />

dt π<br />

Charged stored in the capacitor<br />

µ 0 0<br />

q = C × e = C ×<br />

aI ω ln(2) cos ωt ... (i)<br />

π<br />

∴ Current in the loop<br />

dq<br />

i = C<br />

2<br />

×µ ω<br />

=<br />

0 aI 0<br />

ln(2) sin ωt<br />

dt π<br />

I<br />

2<br />

µ 0 aI0ω<br />

C ln(2)<br />

∴ i ma x =<br />

π<br />

(b) From (1), the graph between charge and time is<br />

Q<br />

Q 0<br />

–Q 0<br />

π/2ω<br />

Here q 0 =<br />

π/ω<br />

2π/ω<br />

3π/2ω<br />

C 0<br />

× µ 0 aI ωln(2)<br />

π<br />

5. Highly energetic electrons are bombarded on a<br />

target of an element containing 30 neutrons. The<br />

ratio of the radii of nucleus to that of Helium<br />

nucleus is (14) 1/3 . Find (a) atomic number of the<br />

nucleus. (b) the frequency of K a line of the X-ray<br />

produced. (R = 1.1 × 10 7 m –1 and c = 3 × 10 8 m/s)<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-2005]<br />

Sol. (a) We know that radius of nucleus is given by the<br />

formula<br />

r = r 0 A 1/3 where r 0 = constant and A = mass<br />

number.<br />

For the Nucleus r 1 = r 0 4 1/3<br />

∴<br />

r<br />

r<br />

2<br />

1<br />

⎛ A ⎞<br />

= ⎜ ⎟⎠<br />

⎝ 4<br />

1/3<br />

⇒ (14) 1/3 ⎛ A ⎞<br />

= ⎜ ⎟⎠<br />

⎝ 4<br />

1/3<br />

⇒ A = 56<br />

∴ No. of proton = A – no. of neutrons<br />

= 56 – 30<br />

= 26<br />

∴ Atomic number = 26<br />

⎡<br />

(b) We know that ν = Rc (z – b) 2 1 1<br />

⎥ ⎥ ⎤<br />

⎢ −<br />

2 21<br />

⎢⎣<br />

n1 n ⎦<br />

Here, R = 1.1 × 10 7 , C = 3 × 10 8 , Z = 26<br />

b = 1 (for K a ), n 1 = 1, n 2 = 2<br />

∴ ν = 1.1 × 10 7 × 3 × 10 8 [26 – 1] 2 ⎡1<br />

1⎤<br />

⎢ − ⎥<br />

⎣4<br />

4⎦ = 3.3 × 10 15 3<br />

× 25 × 25 × = 1.546 × 10 18 Hz.<br />

4<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

6. The standard reduction potential of Ag + /Ag electrode<br />

at 298 K is 0.799V. Given that for AgI,<br />

K sp = 8.7 × 10 –17 , evaluate the potential of Ag + /Ag<br />

electrode in a saturated solution of AgI. Also<br />

calculate the standard reduction potential of<br />

I – electrode.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1994]<br />

t<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 12 DECEMBER 2009


Sol. In the saturated solution of AgI, the half cell<br />

reactions are<br />

At anode : Ag ⎯→ Ag + + e –<br />

At cathode : AgI + e – ⎯→ Ag + I –<br />

Cell reaction AgI ⎯→ Ag + + I –<br />

On applying Nernst equation<br />

0.0591<br />

E cell = Eº cell – log [Ag + ] [I – ]<br />

n<br />

For electrode<br />

Ag + + e – → Ag<br />

∴<br />

E<br />

Ag + = º<br />

/ Ag Ag / Ag<br />

K sp of AgI = [Ag + ] [I – ]<br />

Q [Ag + ] = [I – ]<br />

∴ K sp of AgI = [Ag + ] 2<br />

∴ [Ag + ] of AgI =<br />

E – 0.0591 1<br />

log<br />

+<br />

n [Ag<br />

K sp of AgI<br />

−17<br />

[Ag + ] = 8.7 × 10<br />

= 9.3 × 10 –9 M<br />

So E Ag + / Ag<br />

= 0.799 – 0.0591 1<br />

log<br />

1<br />

−9<br />

9.3×<br />

10<br />

= + 0.799 + 0.0591 log 9.3 – 0.0591 × 9 log 10<br />

= + 0.799 + 0.0591 × 0.9785 – 0.0591 × 9<br />

= 0.325 V<br />

For above cell reaction<br />

0.0591<br />

E cell = Eº cell – log [Ag + ] [I – ]<br />

n<br />

0.0591<br />

= Eº cell – log (K sp of AgI)<br />

n<br />

At equilibrium E cell = 0<br />

0.0591<br />

∴ Eº cell = log(8.7 × 10 –17 ) = –0.95 volt<br />

1<br />

Eº cell = Eº cathode + Eº anode<br />

–<br />

–0.95 = –0.799 + Eº Ag/AgI/I<br />

(In form of cell reaction)<br />

Eº – Ag/AgI/I = – 0.95 + 0.799 = –0.151 V<br />

–<br />

or Eº I /AgI/Ag = + 0.151 V<br />

7. A sample of hard water contains 96 ppm of SO 2– 4 and<br />

183 ppm of HCO – 3 with 60 ppm of Ca 2+ as the only<br />

cation. How many moles of CaO will be required to<br />

remove HCO 2– 3 from 100 kg of this water ? If 1000<br />

kg of this water is treated with the amount of CaO<br />

calculated above, what will be the concentration (in<br />

ppm) of residual Ca 2+ ions ? (Assume CaCO 3 to be<br />

completely insoluble in water). If the Ca 2+ ions in one<br />

litre of the treated water are completely exchanged<br />

with hydrogen ions, what will be its pH ? (one ppm<br />

means one part of the substance in one million part of<br />

water, mass/mass)<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1997]<br />

+<br />

]<br />

Sol. In 10 6 g(= 1000 kg) of the given hard water, we have<br />

amount of SO 4 2– ions = 96 g<br />

amount of HCO 3 – ions = 183 g<br />

So amount of SO 4 2– ions =<br />

96 g<br />

96 g mol<br />

−1<br />

= 1 mol<br />

and amount of HCO – 183 g<br />

3 ions =<br />

− 1<br />

61 g mol<br />

= 3 mol<br />

These ions are present as CaSO 4 and Ca(HCO 3 ) 2 .<br />

Hence, amount of Ca 2+ ⎛ 3 ⎞<br />

ions = ⎜1 + ⎟ = 2.5 mol<br />

⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

The addition of CaO causes the following reactions:<br />

CaO + Ca(HCO 3 ) 2 → 2CaCO 3 + H 2 O<br />

1.5 mol of CaO will be required for the removal of<br />

1.5 mol of Ca(HCO 3 ) 2 in form of CaCO 3 .<br />

In the treated water, only CaSO 4 is present now.<br />

Thus, 1 mol of Ca 2+ ions will be present in 10 6 g of<br />

water. Hence, its concentration will be 40 ppm.<br />

Molarity of Ca 2+ ions in the treated water will be 10 –3<br />

mol l –1 .<br />

If the Ca 2+ ions are exchanged by H + ions then,<br />

Molartiy of H + in the treated water = 2 × 10 –3 M<br />

Thus, pH = – log(2 × 10 –3 ) = 2.7<br />

8. A white precipitate was formed slowly when AgNO 3<br />

was added to compound (A) with molecular formula<br />

C 6 H 13 Cl. Compound (A) on treatment with hot<br />

alcoholic KOH gave a mixture of two isomeric<br />

alkenes (B) and (C), having formula C 6 H 12 . The<br />

mixture of (B) and (C) on ozonolysis, furnished four<br />

compounds (i) CH 3 CHO, (ii) C 2 H 5 CHO,<br />

(iii) CH 3 COCH 3 and<br />

(iv) CH 3 – CH(CH 3 )–CHO. What are the structures<br />

of (A) and (C) ?<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1986]<br />

Sol. It is given that,<br />

Alcoholic<br />

C 6 H 13 Cl<br />

(A) KOH; –HCl<br />

Alkyl chloride<br />

(i) O 3<br />

C 6 H 12<br />

((ii) H2O/Zn<br />

(B) and (C)<br />

Two alkenes (B) + (C) with<br />

Formula C 6 H 12<br />

CH 3 CHO + C 2 H 5 CHO<br />

+ CH 3 COCH 3 + CH 3 – CH – CHO<br />

CH 3<br />

It is observed that during ozonolysis, no loss of<br />

carbon takes place, it may be concluded that<br />

CH 3 CHO and CH 3 – CH(CH 3 ) – CHO are the<br />

products of one alkene (B) and C 2 H 5 CHO and<br />

CH 3 COCH 3 are the products of other alkene (say)<br />

(C). Thus, from the above we have :<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 13 DECEMBER 2009


H<br />

CH 3 – C = O + O = HC – CH – CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

–2[O]<br />

CH 3 – CH = CH – CH – CH 3<br />

(B)<br />

CH 3<br />

(i) O 3<br />

CH 3 CHO + OHC – CH – CH 3<br />

(ii) H 2 O/Zn<br />

CH 3<br />

Similarly alkene (C) will be derived as :<br />

CH 3<br />

C = O + O = CH.CH 2 CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

–2[O]<br />

CH 3 – C = CH.CH 2 CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(i) O 3<br />

CH 3 – C = O + OHC.CH 2 CH 3<br />

(ii) H 2 O/Zn<br />

CH 3<br />

Since the compounds (B) and (C) are obtained when<br />

(A), C 6 H 13 Cl, is dehydrohalogenated by heating it<br />

with alcoholic KOH, as follows :<br />

CH 3 CH 2 – CH . CH – CH 3<br />

Cl CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

Alc.KOH<br />

CH 3 – CH = CH – CH – CH 3 + CH 3 CH 2 CH = C – CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(B) (20%) (minor)<br />

∆; –HCl<br />

CH 3<br />

(C) (80%) (major)<br />

Since the Cl atom in (A) is an aliphatic chlorine, and<br />

it is attached to a secondary carbon atom which is<br />

adjacent to a tertiary cabon atom and one secondary<br />

carbon atom – CH2 – CH . CH – , it will react<br />

Cl CH 3<br />

slowly with AgNO 3 to give a white precipitate.<br />

Thus,<br />

A, CH 3 – CH 2 – CH – CH – CH 3<br />

B,<br />

C,<br />

Cl<br />

CH 3<br />

3-chloro-2-methyl pentane<br />

CH 3 CH = CH – CH – CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

4-methyl pentene -2<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH = C – CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

2-methyl pentene-2<br />

9. A hydrated metallic salt A, light green in colour,<br />

gives a white anhydrous residue B after being heated<br />

gradually. B is soluble in water and its aqueous<br />

solution reacts with NO to give a dark brown<br />

compound C. B on strong heating gives a brown<br />

residue and a mixture of two gases E and F. The<br />

gaseous mixture, when passed through acidified<br />

permanganate, discharges the pink colour and when<br />

passed through acidified BaCl 2 solution, gives a<br />

white precipitate. Identify A, B, C, D, E and F.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1988]<br />

Sol. The given observations are as follows.<br />

(i) Hydrated metallic salt ⎯ →<br />

(A)<br />

⎯ heat<br />

(B)<br />

white anhydrous residue<br />

(ii) Aqueous solution of B ⎯→<br />

dark brown compound<br />

Strong<br />

heating<br />

(iii) Salt B ⎯ ⎯⎯→<br />

(iv)<br />

Gaseous mixture<br />

(E) + (F)<br />

⎯ NO (C)<br />

Brown residue +<br />

(D)<br />

acidified KMnO 4<br />

BaCl 2 solution<br />

Two gases<br />

(E) + (F)<br />

Pink colour is<br />

discharged<br />

White precipitate<br />

The observation (ii) shows that B must be ferrous<br />

sulphate since with NO, it gives dark brown<br />

compound according to the reaction<br />

[Fe(H 2 O) 6 ] 2+ 2<br />

+ NO → [Fe(H2 O) 5(NO)]<br />

+ + H 2 O<br />

dark brown<br />

Hence, the salt A must be FeSO 4 . 7H 2 O<br />

The observation (iii) is<br />

2FeSO 4 → Fe 2 O 3 + SO 2 + SO 3<br />

(D)<br />

brown<br />

(E) + (F)<br />

The gaseous mixture of SO 2 and SO 3 explains the<br />

observation (iv), namely,<br />

2 2<br />

+ 5SO 2 + 2H 2 O → 2Mn<br />

+ −<br />

+ 5SO + 4H +<br />

2MnO −<br />

4<br />

pink colour<br />

no colour<br />

2H 2 O + SO 2 + SO 3 4H + + SO 2– 2–<br />

3 + SO 4<br />

Ba 2+ + SO 2– 3 → BaSO ; Ba 2+ + SO – 4 → BaSO<br />

3<br />

white ppt.<br />

Hence, the various compounds are<br />

A. FeSO 4 . 7H 2 O B. FeSO 4<br />

C. [Fe(H 2 O) 5 NO]SO 4 D. Fe 2 O 3<br />

E and F SO 2 and SO 3<br />

4<br />

4<br />

white ppt.<br />

10. A white amorphous powder A when heated gives a<br />

colourless gas B, which turns lime water milky and<br />

the residue C which is yellow when hot but white<br />

when cold. The residue C dissolves in dilute HCl and<br />

the resulting solution gives a white precipitate on<br />

addition of potassium ferrocyanide solution. A<br />

dissolves in dilute HCl with the evolution of a gas<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 14 DECEMBER 2009


a+<br />

which is identical in all respects with B. The solution<br />

of A as obtained above gives a white precipitate D on<br />

addition of excess of NH 4 OH and on passing H 2 S.<br />

Another portion of this solution gives initially a white<br />

precipitate E on addition of NaOH solution, which<br />

dissolves on further addition of the base. Identify the<br />

compound A to E.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1979]<br />

Sol. The given information is as follows.<br />

(a)<br />

A<br />

white powder<br />

diluteHCl<br />

⎯ heat ⎯→<br />

(b)C ⎯⎯⎯⎯<br />

→ solution<br />

(c) A<br />

dilute HCl<br />

(i) NH4OH<br />

(ii) H 2 S<br />

D<br />

white precipitate<br />

B +<br />

turns<br />

colourless<br />

milky lime water<br />

gas<br />

K<br />

6<br />

⎯ 4 Fe(CN )<br />

C<br />

hot yellow<br />

residue<br />

white when when<br />

cold<br />

⎯⎯ ⎯⎯ → white precipitate<br />

Solution + B<br />

(i) NaOH<br />

E<br />

white precipitate<br />

dissolves<br />

NaOH<br />

From part (a), we conclude that B is CO 2 as it turns<br />

lime water milky :<br />

Ca(OH 2 ) + CO 2 → CaCO + H 2 O<br />

milky<br />

to this<br />

due<br />

3<br />

and C is ZnO as it becomes yellow on heating and is<br />

white in cold. Hence, the salt A must be ZnCO 3 .<br />

From part (b), it is confirmed that C is a salt of zinc<br />

(II) which dissolves in dilute HCl and white<br />

precipitate obtained after adding K 4 [Fe(CN) 6 is due<br />

to Zn 2 [Fe(CN) 6 ].<br />

From part (c), it is again confirmed that A is ZnCO 3<br />

as on adding dilute HCl, we get CO 2 and zinc (II)<br />

goes into solution. White precipitate is of ZnS which<br />

is precipitated in ammonical medium as its solubility<br />

product is not very low. White precipitate E is of<br />

Zn(OH) 2 which dissolves as zincate, in excess of<br />

NaOH. Hence the given information is explained as<br />

follows.<br />

(a) ZnCO<br />

(b) ZnO<br />

⎯ heat ⎯→ CO<br />

(B) 2 +<br />

3<br />

(A)<br />

⎯ dil ⎯<br />

HCl ⎯→<br />

ZnCl<br />

(C)<br />

solution 2<br />

(c) ZnCO 3<br />

ZnO<br />

(C)<br />

K<br />

6<br />

⎯ 4 Fe(CN )<br />

⎯ dil ⎯<br />

HCl ⎯→<br />

Solution 2<br />

ZnCl 2 + S 2– → ZnS ↓ + 2Cl –<br />

(D)<br />

Zn 2+ + 2OH – → Zn(OH)<br />

⎯⎯<br />

⎯⎯ → Zn [Fe(CN)<br />

ZnCl + CO 2 + H 2 O<br />

2<br />

(E)<br />

2-<br />

2<br />

dissolves<br />

Zn(OH) 2 + 2OH – → ZnO + 2H 2 O<br />

2 6 ]<br />

White precipitate<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

11. Determine the name of the name of the curve<br />

described parametrically by the equations<br />

x = t 2 + t + 1, y = t 2 – t + 1 [<strong>IIT</strong>-1998]<br />

Sol. We have,<br />

x = t 2 + t + 1 and, y = t 2 – t + 1<br />

⇒ x + y = 2(t 2 + 1) and, x – y = 2t<br />

⎪⎧<br />

2<br />

⎛ x − y ⎞ ⎪⎫<br />

⇒ x + y = 2 ⎨⎜<br />

⎟ + 1⎬<br />

⎪⎩ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎪⎭<br />

⇒ 2(x + y) = (x – y) 2 + 4<br />

⇒ x 2 + y 2 – 2xy – 2x – 2y + 4<br />

Comparing this equation with the equation<br />

ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, we get<br />

a = 1, b = 1, c = 4, h = –1, g = –1 and f = –1<br />

∴ abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg 2 – ch 2 = 4 – 2 – 1 – 1 – 4 ≠ 0<br />

and , h 2 – ab = 1 – 1 = 0<br />

Thus, we have<br />

∆ ≠ 0 and h 2 = ab<br />

So, the given equations represent a parabola.<br />

12. The circle x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed in a<br />

triangle which has two of its sides along the<br />

coordinate axes. If the locus of the circumcentre of<br />

the triangle is<br />

2<br />

x + y – xy + k x + y = 0,<br />

find the value of k.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1987]<br />

Sol. Let OAB be the triangle in which the circle<br />

x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed. Let the<br />

x y<br />

equation of AB be + = 1<br />

a b<br />

y<br />

B(0,b)<br />

C<br />

2<br />

x y<br />

+ = 1<br />

a b<br />

2<br />

x´ O (a, 0)A x<br />

y´<br />

Since AB touches the circle x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0.<br />

There fore,<br />

2 2<br />

+ −1<br />

a b<br />

1 1<br />

+<br />

2 2<br />

a b<br />

⎛ 2 2 ⎞<br />

⎜ + −1⎟<br />

a b<br />

= 2 ⇒ –<br />

⎝ ⎠<br />

= 2<br />

1 1<br />

+<br />

2 2<br />

a b<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 15 DECEMBER 2009


[Q O(0, 0) and C(2, 2) lie on the same side of AB<br />

Therefore, a<br />

2 + b<br />

2 – 1 < 0]<br />

(2b + 2a – ab)<br />

⇒ –<br />

= 2<br />

2 2<br />

a + b<br />

2<br />

⇒ 2a + 2b – ab + 2 a + b = 0 ...(i)<br />

Let P(h, k) be the circumcentre of ∆OAB. Since<br />

∆ OAB is a right angled triangle. So its circumcentre<br />

is the mid-point of AB.<br />

a b<br />

∴ h = and k = 2 2<br />

⇒ a = 2h and b = 2k<br />

From (i) and (ii), we get<br />

4h + 4k – 4hk + 2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

4 h + 4k = 0<br />

⇒ h + k – hk + h + k = 0<br />

So, the locus of P(h, k) is<br />

2<br />

2<br />

...(ii)<br />

x + y – xy + x + y = 0<br />

But, the locus of the circumcentre is given to be<br />

x + y – xy + k x + y = 0<br />

Thus, the value of k is 1<br />

2<br />

13. Let C be any circle with centre (0, 2 ). Prove that at<br />

most two rational points can be there on C.<br />

(A rational points is a point both of whose<br />

coordinates are rational numbers) [<strong>IIT</strong>-1997]<br />

Sol. The equation of any circle C with centre (0, 2) is<br />

given by<br />

2<br />

2<br />

(x – 0) 2 + (y – 2) 2 = r 2 , where r is any positive real<br />

number.<br />

or, x 2 + y 2 – 2 2 y = r 2 – 2<br />

If possible, let P(x 1 , y 1 ), Q(x 2 , y 2 ) and R(x 3 , y 3 ) be<br />

three distinct rational points on circle C. Then,<br />

2 2<br />

x + y 2 2 y 1 = r 2 – 2 ...(ii)<br />

x<br />

1 1 −<br />

2 2<br />

2 2 −<br />

2<br />

+ y 2 2 y 2 = r 2 – 2 ...(iii)<br />

2<br />

x 3 + y3<br />

− 2 2 y 3 = r 2 – 2 ...(iv)<br />

We claim that at least two y 1 , y 2 , and y 3 are distinct.<br />

For if y 1 = y 2 = y 3 , then P, Q and R lie on a line<br />

parallel to x-axis and a line parallel to x-axis does not<br />

cross the circle in more than two points. Thus, we<br />

have either y 1 ≠ y 2 or, y 1 ≠ y 3 or, y 2 ≠ y 3 .<br />

Subtracting (ii) from (iii) and (iv), we get<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

(x 2 + y 2)<br />

– (x1 + y1<br />

) – 2 2 (y 2 – y 1 ) = 0<br />

and,<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

(x 3 + y3<br />

) – (x1 + y1<br />

) – 2 2 (y 3 – y 1 ) = 0<br />

⇒ a 1 – 2b 1 = 0 and a 2 – 2b 2 = 0 ...(v)<br />

2<br />

where,<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

a 1 = (x 2 + y 2)<br />

– (x1 + y1<br />

) , b 1 = 2(y 2 – y 1 )<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

a 2 = (x 3 + y3<br />

) – (x1 + y1<br />

) , b 2 = 2(y 3 – y 1 )<br />

Clearly, a 1 , a 2 , b 1 , b 2 are rational numbers as x 1 , x 2 ,<br />

x 3 , y 1 , y 2 , y 3 are rational numbers.<br />

Since either y 1 ≠ y 2 or, y 1 ≠ y 3<br />

∴ Either b 1 ≠ 0 or, b 2 ≠ 0<br />

If b 1 ≠ 0, then<br />

a 1 – 2b 1 = 0 [From (v)]<br />

a1<br />

⇒ = 2,<br />

b<br />

1<br />

a1<br />

which is not possible because is a rational<br />

b1<br />

number and 2 is an irrational number.<br />

If b 2 ≠ 0, then<br />

a 2<br />

a 2 – 2b 2 = 0 ⇒ = 2,<br />

b<br />

2<br />

a 2<br />

which is not possible because is a rational<br />

b2<br />

number and 2 is an irrational number.<br />

Thus, in both the cases we arrive at a contradiction.<br />

This means that our supposition is wrong. Hence,<br />

there can be at most two rational points on circle C.<br />

14. A rectangle PQRS has its side PQ parallel to the line<br />

y = mx and vertices P, Q and S lie on the lines y = a,<br />

x = b and x = –b, respectively. Find the locus of the<br />

vertex R.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1996]<br />

Sol. Let the coordinates of R be (h, k). It is given that P<br />

lies on y = a. So, let the coordinates of P be (x 1 , a).<br />

Since PQ is parallel to the line y = mx. Therefore,<br />

Slope of PQ = (Slope of y = mx) = m<br />

1<br />

And, Slope of PS = –<br />

(Slope of y = mx)<br />

1<br />

= – [∴ PS ⊥ PQ]<br />

m<br />

Now, equation of PQ is<br />

y – a = m(x – x 1 )<br />

x = –b<br />

x´ S<br />

(0, – b)<br />

(0, a)<br />

R<br />

O<br />

y<br />

y = 0<br />

P<br />

x = b<br />

Q<br />

(0, b)<br />

x<br />

...(i)<br />

y´<br />

It is given that Q lies on x = b. So, Q is the point of<br />

intersection if (i) and x = b.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 16 DECEMBER 2009


Putting x = b in (i), we get<br />

y = a + m(b – x 1 )<br />

So, coordinates of Q are (b, a + m(b – x 1 )).<br />

Since PS passes through P(x 1 , a) and has slope – m<br />

1 .<br />

So, Equation of PS is<br />

y – a = – m<br />

1 (x – x1 )<br />

...(ii)<br />

It is given that S lies on x = – b. So, S is the point of<br />

intersection of (ii) and x = –b.<br />

Solving (ii) and x = – b, we get<br />

y = a + m<br />

1 (b + x1 )<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

So, coordinates of S are ⎜− b,a<br />

+ (b + x1<br />

) ⎟<br />

⎝ m ⎠<br />

1<br />

k − a − (b + x1)<br />

Now, Slope of RS = m = m<br />

h + b<br />

But RS is parallel to PQ.<br />

1<br />

k − a − (b + x1)<br />

∴<br />

m = m<br />

h + b<br />

⇒ b + x 1 = m(k – a) – m 2 (h + b) ...(iii)<br />

Similarly,<br />

k − a − m(b − x1)<br />

Slope of RQ =<br />

h − b<br />

But, RQ is perpendicular to PQ whose slope is m.<br />

k − a − m(b − x1)<br />

1<br />

∴<br />

= –<br />

h − b m<br />

1 1<br />

⇒ b – x 1 = (k – a) + m<br />

2 (h – a) ...(iv)<br />

m<br />

We have only one variable x 1 . To eliminate x 1 , add<br />

(iii) and (iv) to obtain<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

2b = (k – a) ⎜m + ⎟ – m 2 1<br />

(h + b) +<br />

⎝ m ⎠<br />

2 (h – b)<br />

m<br />

⎛ m ⎞<br />

⇒ 2b = (k – a) ⎜<br />

2 + 1 ⎛<br />

4<br />

m ⎞<br />

⎟<br />

– h ⎜<br />

+ 1 ⎛<br />

4<br />

m ⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ m<br />

2<br />

– b ⎜<br />

+ 1<br />

⎟<br />

⎠ ⎝ m<br />

2<br />

⎠ ⎝ m ⎠<br />

⎛ m ⎞<br />

⇒ (k – a) ⎜<br />

2 + 1<br />

⎟<br />

–<br />

⎝ m ⎠<br />

2<br />

h (m −1)(m<br />

+ 1)<br />

m<br />

–<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

b (m + 1)<br />

h(m 2 −1)<br />

b(m 2 + 1)<br />

⇒ (k – a) – – = 0<br />

m m<br />

⇒ m(k – a) – h(m 2 – 1) – b(m 2 + 1) = 0<br />

Hence, the locus of R(h, k) is<br />

m(y – a) – x(m 2 – 1) – b(m 2 + 1) = 0<br />

m<br />

2<br />

2<br />

= 0<br />

15. If A, B, C are the angles of a triangle ABC and the<br />

system of linear equations<br />

x sin A + y sin B + z sin C = 0<br />

x sin B + y sin C + z sin A = 0<br />

x sin C + y sin A + z sin B = 0<br />

has a non trivial solution, prove that<br />

sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – (cos A + cos B + cos C<br />

+ cos A cos B + cos B cos C + cos C cos A) = 0<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-2002]<br />

Sol. The given system of linear equations has a non-trivial<br />

solution. Therefore,<br />

⇒<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

sin A + sin B + sin C<br />

sin B + sin C + sin A<br />

sin C + sin A + sin B<br />

= 0<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

Applying C 1 → C 1 + C 2 + C 3<br />

⇒ (sin A + sin B + sin C)<br />

⇒<br />

⇒<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

0<br />

0<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

sin A − sin B<br />

= 0<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

= 0<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

= 0<br />

⎡Qsin A + sin B + sin C ⎤<br />

⎢ A B C ⎥<br />

⎢=<br />

4cos cos cos ≠0<br />

⎣ 2 2 2 ⎥<br />

⎦<br />

sin C<br />

sin C − sin B sin A − sin C = 0<br />

sin B − sin C<br />

Applying R 2 → R 2 – R 1 , R 3 → R 3 – R 1<br />

⇒ –(sin B – sin C) 2 – (sin A – sin C)<br />

(sin A – sin B) = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 B + sin 2 C – 2 sin B sin C + sin 2 A<br />

– sin A sin B – sin C sin A + sin B sin C = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – sin A sin B – sin B sin C<br />

– sin C sin A = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – cos A cos B<br />

– cos B cos C – cos C cos A + cos (A + B)<br />

+ cos (B + C) + cos (C + A) = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – cos A cos B<br />

– cos B cos C – cos C cos A – cos A<br />

– cos B – cos C = 0<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 17 DECEMBER 2009


Physics Challenging Problems<br />

Set # 8<br />

This section is designed to give <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety<br />

of possible twists and turns of problems in physics that would be very helpful in facing <strong>IIT</strong><br />

<strong>JEE</strong>. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and we<br />

hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and<br />

enhancing the preparation level of <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants.<br />

By : Dev Sharma<br />

Solutions will be published in next issue<br />

Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch<br />

Passage # 1 (Ques. 1 to 3)<br />

Young's double slit experiment is conducted with the<br />

following conditions<br />

1. Slit S 1 and slit S 2 are of same width<br />

2. Slits are illuminated by monochromatic light source<br />

of wave length 'λ b ' which is of blue color.<br />

3. Distance between slits and screen D. Distance<br />

between slits is 2d and D > > 2d<br />

It is observed that 1st bright fringe is observed in<br />

front of one of the slit.<br />

1. If monochromatic light source of blue color is<br />

replaced by the white colored light source then<br />

maximum wavelength which is missing in front of<br />

one of the slit is -<br />

(A) Never of indigo and violet colors<br />

(B) It is always of less than blue color<br />

(C) Missing wave lengths can have wave length<br />

more or less than blue color<br />

(D)<br />

λ<br />

2 = λ<br />

max . .<br />

( missing ) 3<br />

b<br />

2. Relation of the maximum wavelength missing with<br />

wave length of Blue light is -<br />

(A) 2λ b<br />

(B) 3λ b<br />

(C) 4λ b<br />

(D) 5λ b<br />

3. With blue light if the slit widths are made unequal<br />

then -<br />

(A) Position of 1st bright fringe will not be in front<br />

of one of the slit<br />

(B) Dark fringe which was of black colour earlier<br />

with same slit widths now is of blue colour<br />

(C) YDSE can not be conducted with unequal slit<br />

widths<br />

(D) Dark fringe is always black either the slit widths<br />

are equal or not<br />

Passage # 2 (Ques. 4 to 5)<br />

For the given circuit<br />

a<br />

R<br />

8R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

4R<br />

3R<br />

12R<br />

4. What should be the value of R so that equivalent<br />

resistance between terminals a and b is 1Ω -<br />

2 5<br />

(A) Ω (B) Ω<br />

5 2<br />

(C) 2Ω<br />

2R<br />

R<br />

(D) 15Ω<br />

5. If current passing through the circuit is 1 amp then-<br />

(A) Potential difference across 4R and 8R is in the<br />

ratio of 1 : 2<br />

(B) Potential difference across ab is 1 volt when<br />

measured by an ideal voltmeter if R = 5<br />

2 Ω<br />

(C) Maximum potential difference will appear<br />

across 12R resistance<br />

(D) Maximum potential difference will appear<br />

across 3R resistance<br />

R<br />

b<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 18 DECEMBER 2009


Passage # 3 (Ques. 6 to 8)<br />

Behaviour of capacitor in electric circuits is very<br />

typical because of it's energy storing nature.<br />

Capacitor behaves in just opposite manner to<br />

inductor, Inductor 'L' which is measured in Henary<br />

in SI system stores the energy in magnetic field<br />

instead of capacitor which stores in electric field<br />

Inductor opposes the change in current and capacitor<br />

opposes change in voltage.<br />

Behaviour of inductor:<br />

t = 0<br />

t → ∞<br />

Steady<br />

State<br />

open switch<br />

Closed switch<br />

For the electric circuit shown<br />

ε 1<br />

R<br />

L/R is known as time constant<br />

of R-L series circuit which is<br />

measured in ohm<br />

R 1<br />

C<br />

ε 2<br />

R 2<br />

6. If capacitance C varies even after that energy stored<br />

in capacitor is zero at steady state then -<br />

R1<br />

ε1<br />

R1<br />

ε 2<br />

(A) = (B) =<br />

R 2 ε 2<br />

R 2 ε1<br />

(C) ε 1 + ε 2 = 0 (D) ε 1 R 1 + ε 2 R 2 = 0<br />

7. Time constant for the circuit -<br />

(A) RC (B) R 1 C if ε 1 > ε 2<br />

⎛ R<br />

(C) R 2 C if ε 1 < ε 2 (D) ⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

1R<br />

2<br />

R+<br />

C<br />

⎝ R1<br />

+ R2<br />

⎠<br />

ε1<br />

/ R1<br />

− ε1<br />

/ R 2<br />

where ε eq =<br />

1/ R1<br />

+ 1/ R 2<br />

R1R<br />

2<br />

R eq =<br />

R + R<br />

1<br />

2<br />

8. Maximum current passing through resistance R -<br />

εeq<br />

εeq<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

R<br />

R + R<br />

(C)<br />

ε eq<br />

R<br />

eq<br />

(D)<br />

−<br />

R<br />

eq<br />

| ε1 ε2<br />

|<br />

SCIENCE TIPS<br />

• What is the expression for growing current, in LR<br />

⎛ R<br />

− t ⎞<br />

circuit ? I = I 0<br />

⎜1<br />

− e<br />

L ⎟<br />

⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ ⎠<br />

• What is the range of infrared spectrum ?<br />

This covers wavelengths<br />

from 10 –3 m down to 7.8 × 10 –7 m<br />

• What is the nature of graph between electric field<br />

and potential energy (U) ?<br />

The nature of the graph<br />

will be parabola having<br />

symmetry about U-axis<br />

• Why no beats can be heard if the frequencies of<br />

the two interfering waves differ by more than ten ?<br />

this is due to persistence<br />

of hearing<br />

• Why heating systems based on steam are more<br />

efficient than those based on circulation of hot<br />

water ?<br />

This is because steam<br />

has more heat than water<br />

a the same temperature<br />

• Can the specific heat of a gas be infinity ? Yes<br />

• What is the liquid ascent formula for a capillary ?<br />

2T cosθ r<br />

h = –<br />

γpg<br />

3<br />

where h is the height through<br />

which a liquid of density ρ and<br />

surface tension T rises in a<br />

capillary tube of radius r<br />

• What is the expression for total time of flight (T)<br />

2u sin θ<br />

for oblique projection ? T =<br />

g<br />

• The space charge limited current i P in the diode<br />

3/2<br />

value is given by i P = k V p<br />

• What is an ideal gas ?<br />

An ideal gas is one in<br />

which intermolecular<br />

forces are absent<br />

• Can a rough sea be calmed by pouring oil on its<br />

surface ?<br />

Yes<br />

• What is the expression for fringe width (β) in<br />

Young's double slit experiment? β=Dλ/d where<br />

D is the distance between the<br />

source and screen and d is<br />

distance between two slits<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 19 DECEMBER 2009


8<br />

Solution<br />

Set # 7<br />

Physics Challenging Problems<br />

Questions were Published in November Issue<br />

1. As the resistances of voltmeters in upper branch are<br />

R, R/2, R/4 ......................<br />

the equivalent circuit is as shown below<br />

3. From current division formula we can conclude that<br />

current in upper and lower branch are in the ratio of<br />

1 : 2.<br />

a<br />

R<br />

R/2 R/4<br />

V<br />

Lower Branch<br />

upper Branch<br />

...................<br />

the resistance of upper branch is<br />

= R + R/2 + R/4 + ............. up to infinite<br />

⎛ 1 1 ⎞<br />

= R ⎜1<br />

+ + + ..... ⎟<br />

⎝ 2 4 ⎠<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

= R ⎜ ⎟ = 2R<br />

⎝1−1/<br />

2 ⎠<br />

further the equivalent circuit is<br />

a<br />

R<br />

V<br />

upper branch<br />

Lower Branch<br />

the resistance of voltmeter V should be 2R so that<br />

current in upper and lower branch is same.<br />

2. Entire upper branch is having the resistance of 2R<br />

and voltmeter V 1 is having the resistance of R so we<br />

can conclude that equivalent resistance of all the<br />

voltmeters in upper branch except V 1 is R and the<br />

upper branch is as follows:<br />

a V 1 V 2 V 3<br />

.....up to infinite b<br />

a<br />

i<br />

R<br />

C<br />

V 1 =X V 2 =Y<br />

As reading of voltmeter V 1 is X = i.R<br />

sum of the readings of voltmeters is Y = i.R<br />

Except V 1 in upper branch<br />

So,<br />

X = Y<br />

R<br />

b<br />

b<br />

b<br />

4.<br />

a<br />

i<br />

2i<br />

R<br />

C<br />

R′ = R<br />

voltmeter V<br />

Reading of voltmeter V 1 is i.R<br />

Reading of voltmeter V is (2i.)R<br />

So V = 2V 1<br />

a.<br />

x.<br />

A<br />

b.<br />

d x.<br />

l = length of rod = b – a<br />

l.<br />

B<br />

charge on element of length d x is d q<br />

d q = λd x as λ = 3x<br />

d q = 3xd x<br />

Equivalent current due to element of length d x<br />

ω<br />

d i = ω.d q =<br />

2 (3xd x) π<br />

ω<br />

Total equivalent current i =<br />

∫di<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

(3xd x )<br />

2 π<br />

3ω<br />

=<br />

2 π<br />

⎡<br />

2<br />

x ⎤<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎣ 2<br />

⎦<br />

b<br />

a<br />

3ω<br />

=<br />

2 π<br />

⎛ b<br />

⎜<br />

⎝<br />

3 ω<br />

= (b 2 – a 2 )<br />

4π<br />

Option A is correct<br />

(B) Equivalent current<br />

2<br />

R<br />

− a<br />

2<br />

2<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

b<br />

a<br />

b<br />

3 ω<br />

= . 2 2 π<br />

(b2 – a 2 )<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 20 DECEMBER 2009


=<br />

3 ω (b 2 – a 2 ) =<br />

4π<br />

3 ω (b – a)(b + a)<br />

4π<br />

3 ω<br />

3<br />

= (b + a)(b – a) = ω. (b + a).l<br />

4 π 4π<br />

As ω = 4π/3 So,<br />

3 4π<br />

Equivalent current = . . (b + a).l<br />

4π<br />

3<br />

= (b + a).l = const.l<br />

i ∝ l<br />

Option B is correct.<br />

(D) Charge on rod<br />

=<br />

b<br />

=<br />

⎡x<br />

q =<br />

∫d<br />

q ∫3xd<br />

x 3. ⎢<br />

⎣ 2 ⎥ ⎦<br />

a<br />

= 2<br />

3 (b 2 – a 2 )<br />

Option D is correct<br />

Ans. A, B, D<br />

5. For part B<br />

q > q<br />

closed cone<br />

open cone<br />

for part A<br />

q = q<br />

closed cone<br />

open cone<br />

ω<br />

Equivalent current i =<br />

2 .q π<br />

2<br />

⎤<br />

ω<br />

i =<br />

2 .q , i = ω<br />

π 2 π<br />

.q<br />

cone - C 1 (closed cone) cone-C 3 (closed cone)<br />

ω<br />

=<br />

2 .q i = ω<br />

π 2 π<br />

.(σ)<br />

(closed cone) (Surface area of<br />

closed cone)<br />

If σ varies then charge on cone C 1 differs from C 3 So<br />

their currents will be different.<br />

Option A incorrect<br />

q = q<br />

(cone C 1 ) (cone - C 2 )<br />

ω<br />

i =<br />

( coneC 1)<br />

2 . ω<br />

q and i = π ( ConeC1<br />

) ( coneC2<br />

) 2 . q π ( ConeC2<br />

)<br />

i = i<br />

(cone C 1 ) (cone C 2 )<br />

b<br />

a<br />

Option B is correct<br />

As charge on cone C 3 ≠ charge on cone C 4<br />

Option C correct<br />

Part-A and part-B will have different charges so<br />

option D incorrect<br />

Ans. B, C<br />

6. The circuit is as follows<br />

CT<br />

10Ω<br />

R 1<br />

Full scale deflection current for galvanometer is<br />

50m<br />

i g = = 5mA<br />

10Ω<br />

For terminals CT and a range is 5V so<br />

V 5<br />

using R = – G ⇒ R1 = – 10 = 990Ω<br />

i<br />

−3<br />

g<br />

5 × 10<br />

R 1 = 990Ω<br />

7. Range between CT and b is 10 volt so,<br />

V 10<br />

Using R = – G ⇒ R1 + R 2 = – 10<br />

i<br />

−3<br />

g<br />

5×<br />

10<br />

990 + R 2 = 2000 – 10<br />

R 2 = 2000 – 1000 = 1000Ω<br />

R 2 = 1000Ω<br />

8. Range between CT and c is V so<br />

V<br />

Using R = – G<br />

i g<br />

R 1 + R 2 + R 3 =<br />

V<br />

5 × 10<br />

−3<br />

a<br />

– 10<br />

R 2<br />

V<br />

⇒ 990 + 1000 + 3000 =<br />

5 × 10<br />

b<br />

−3<br />

R 3<br />

c<br />

– 10<br />

V<br />

⇒ 5000 =<br />

−3<br />

5 × 10<br />

⇒ V = 25 volt<br />

So range between CT and C is 25 volts.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 21 DECEMBER 2009


PHYSICS<br />

Students' Forum<br />

Expert’s Solution for Question asked by <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Aspirants<br />

1. A homogeneous sphere of radius r rolls without<br />

slipping with constant angular speed ω' over bigger<br />

sphere, of radius R, which is in pure rotation with<br />

constant angular speed ω about its centre O. (Fig.)<br />

Find the time taken.<br />

ω<br />

R<br />

O<br />

ω′<br />

r<br />

C<br />

(i) for the centre C of the rolling sphere to return to its<br />

initial position (with respect to O), and<br />

(ii) for the point of contact of the rolling sphere to make<br />

one full revolution over the bigger rotating sphere.<br />

(b)(i) Determine the acceleration of the contact point of the<br />

rolling sphere, and<br />

(ii) the point of greatest acceleration of the rolling sphere<br />

(both w.r.t. the centre O)<br />

Sol. Suppose that at t = 0, the contact points of lie along<br />

the fixed line (reference line) OX. Let at time t the<br />

line OC makes the angle θ with OX (Fig.)<br />

ω<br />

O<br />

^<br />

t<br />

C<br />

P<br />

θ P′<br />

It is better to express the velocity and acceleration of<br />

any point including contact point P (say) at an<br />

arbitrary instant of time t as,<br />

v po = v co and a po = a co = a pc + a pc + a co (1)<br />

We know that in the case of pure rolling the velocity<br />

of contact point of the rolling body has zero velocity<br />

and zero tangential acceleration relative to the contact<br />

point of the surface on which it rolls. So if P′ be the<br />

contact point of rotating sphere at time t, then<br />

v p′o = v po<br />

So, v p'o = v pc + v co (2)<br />

ω′<br />

X<br />

(a) If t is the direction of common tangent, then from<br />

eqn. (2)<br />

v p'o (t) = v pc (t) + v co (t)<br />

⎛ dθ<br />

⎞<br />

ωR = – ω′R + ⎜ ⎟ (R + r)<br />

⎝ dt ⎠<br />

dθ ωR<br />

+ ω'r<br />

or,<br />

=<br />

(3)<br />

dt R + r<br />

R + r<br />

so, dt =<br />

dθ (4)<br />

( ωR<br />

+ ω'r)<br />

(ii) It is simple to observer if rotating sphere were at rest,<br />

the CM of rolling sphere C will turn by the angle 2 π,<br />

⎛ dθ<br />

⎞<br />

with angular speed ⎜ ⎟ – ω to satisfy the condition<br />

⎝ dt ⎠<br />

of the problem.<br />

dθ<br />

dt<br />

ω<br />

Hence the sought time t′ (say) is given by<br />

2π<br />

2π(R<br />

+ r)<br />

t′ = = [using Eq. (4)]<br />

⎛ dθ<br />

⎞ r( ω−ω ' )<br />

⎜ ⎟ − ω<br />

⎝ dt ⎠<br />

(b) From a po = a pc + a co = a pc (tangential) + a pc (normal) + a co<br />

In our case a pc (tangential) = 0, because ω′ = constant<br />

Hence, a po = a pc (normal) + a co (5)<br />

⎡<br />

2<br />

⎤<br />

2 ⎛ dθ<br />

⎞<br />

a po = ⎢− ω'<br />

r + ⎜ ⎟ (R + r)<br />

⎥<br />

⎢⎣<br />

⎝ dt ⎠ ⎥⎦<br />

dθ ωR<br />

+ ω'r<br />

(using = from equation (3) or part (a))<br />

dt R + r<br />

(ii) From eqn. (5) it is obvious that the maximum value<br />

|apo | ma x = |a pc (normal) | + | a co |<br />

2<br />

= – ω′ 2 ⎛ dθ<br />

⎞<br />

r + ⎜ ⎟⎠ (R + r)<br />

⎝ dt<br />

dθ<br />

where will be substituted from Eqn. (3).<br />

dt<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 22 DECEMBER 2009


2. Show that the temperature of a planet varies inversely<br />

as the square root of its distance from the Sun.<br />

Sol. Let R s be the radius of the Sun. Consider the Sun as a<br />

black body.<br />

Energy emitted per sec by it equals 4 π R σ T<br />

4<br />

This energy falls uniformly on the inner surface of<br />

spheres centred on the Sun. If d is the distance of the<br />

planet from the Sun, then energy falling on unit area<br />

of the sphere of radius d is :<br />

2 4<br />

sσTs<br />

2<br />

4πR<br />

σR sTs<br />

=<br />

2<br />

4πd<br />

d<br />

This energy received by the planet is given by<br />

2<br />

4<br />

2<br />

Q = πr 2 σR sTs<br />

= where r is the radius of planet.<br />

2<br />

d<br />

If T is the temperature of the planet, then energy lost<br />

by it per sec is 4 π r 2 σ T 4<br />

In the steady state the rate of reception of energy is<br />

equal to the loss of energy<br />

Hence, 4 π r 2 σ T 4 πr σR<br />

=<br />

2<br />

d<br />

1<br />

Thus, T ∝<br />

d<br />

4<br />

2<br />

2 4<br />

s Ts<br />

3. A sphere of specific gravity s just fits into a vertical<br />

cylinder with lower end closed. The sphere is allowed<br />

to drop slowly until it is held in equilibrium by the<br />

thrust of the compressed air. There is no leakage of<br />

air. If the diameter of the sphere is d, the length of<br />

the cylinder is L and the height of the water<br />

barometer is h, then what will be the position of<br />

sphere ?<br />

Sol. Initially, the cylinder contained air at atmospheric<br />

pressure. When the sphere comes down into the<br />

cylinder by the action of its own weight, it presses the<br />

air downwards. Suppose the sphere comes to position<br />

C which is at height x above the closed end. Let the<br />

sphere remain in equilibrium in this position.<br />

Volume of sphere = (4/3)πr 3<br />

Weight of the sphere = (4/3)πr 3 sg<br />

Volume of cylinder = πr 2 L<br />

Volume of air inside the cylinder when the sphere is<br />

in position A = πr 2 L – (2/3)πr 3<br />

2<br />

s<br />

s<br />

Volume of compressed air when the sphere is in<br />

position C = [πr 2 x – (2/3)πr 3 ]<br />

Atmospheric pressure = h cm of water<br />

Let the pressure of compressed air be p cm of water.<br />

L<br />

d<br />

According to Boyle's Law (assuming no change in<br />

the temperature of compressed air)<br />

p[πr 2 x – (2/3)πr 3 ] = h[πr 2 L – (2/3)πr 3 ]<br />

or p[x – (2r/3) = h[L – (2r/3)] ...(1)<br />

In the equilibrium position C, the weight of the<br />

sphere is balanced by the difference of vertical thrust<br />

on either side due to atmospheric and compressed air.<br />

Hence, πr 2 (p – h)g = mg = (4/3)πr 3 sg<br />

or p – h = (4/3)rs ...(2)<br />

From equation (1) and (2), we get<br />

h(3L<br />

− 2r)<br />

x =<br />

+<br />

3p<br />

h(3L − 2r)<br />

or x =<br />

+<br />

3h + 4rs<br />

or x =<br />

2<br />

9hL + 2d s<br />

9h + 6ds<br />

2r<br />

3<br />

A<br />

C<br />

x<br />

2 r 9hL + 8r s<br />

=<br />

3 3(3h + 4rs)<br />

4. Given the position of the object O and the image I as<br />

shown in the figure. Find (a) the position of the<br />

convex lens (b) its focal length and the magnification<br />

of the image. Verify graphically.<br />

2<br />

1<br />

0<br />

–1<br />

–2<br />

Y<br />

O<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14<br />

Sol. A ray of light from the object passes undeviated<br />

through the optic centre of the lens (C) and also the<br />

image I. So join OI.<br />

So it cuts the principal axis XY and C. So AB is the<br />

position of the lens. A ray parallel to the principal<br />

axis from the object after refraction meets the<br />

principal axis at F. F is the focus.<br />

2<br />

I<br />

X<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 23 DECEMBER 2009


X<br />

O<br />

4<br />

C<br />

A<br />

8 F<br />

B<br />

10.4<br />

14<br />

F is at a distance 2.4 cm from C.<br />

∴ Focal length of lens = 2.4 × 10 = 24 cm<br />

By calculation<br />

1 1 1 = –<br />

f v u<br />

1 1<br />

= – 60 − 40<br />

∴ f = 24 cm<br />

100 1<br />

= = 2400 24<br />

v 60 3<br />

Magnification = = = u 40 2<br />

=<br />

=<br />

length of image<br />

length of object<br />

3 mm<br />

2 mm<br />

= 2<br />

3<br />

5. Calculate the magnetic field B at the point P shown<br />

in the figure. Assume that i = 10 A and a = 8.0 cm.<br />

B a/4<br />

a<br />

4<br />

i<br />

A<br />

P<br />

i<br />

Sol. First of all, we determine the expression of B at a<br />

distance R from a straight conductor of length l.<br />

x<br />

x 2<br />

x 1<br />

φ<br />

dx<br />

i<br />

R<br />

Consider a typical element dx. The magnitude of the<br />

contribution dB of this element to the magnetic field<br />

at P as found from Biot-Savart's law is<br />

r<br />

C<br />

i<br />

D<br />

I<br />

X<br />

µ 0idxsin<br />

θ<br />

dB =<br />

...(i)<br />

2<br />

4πr<br />

Since, the direction of the contribution dB at the<br />

point P for all elements are identical viz, at right<br />

angle into the plane of the figure, the resultant field is<br />

obtained by simply integration equation (i), which<br />

gives<br />

x<br />

B =<br />

∫ 2 µ 0i<br />

dB =<br />

4π<br />

x1<br />

x 2<br />

∫<br />

x1<br />

sin θdx<br />

where, sin θ = r<br />

R and r = (x 2 + R 2 ) 1/2<br />

µ 0iR<br />

∴ B =<br />

4π<br />

x2<br />

r<br />

∫<br />

+<br />

x1<br />

2<br />

dx<br />

2 2<br />

( x R )<br />

3/ 2<br />

Let x = R tan φ, such that dx = R sec 2 φ dφ<br />

At x = x 1 φ 1 = tan –1 ⎛ x ⎞<br />

⎜ 1<br />

⎟ and x = x 2 ,<br />

⎝ R ⎠<br />

x 2<br />

φ 2 = tan –1 ⎛ ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ R ⎠<br />

Also, x 2 + R 2 = R 2 tan 2 φ + R 2 = R 2 sec 2 φ<br />

Hence, equation (ii) becomes<br />

B =<br />

µ 0iR<br />

4π<br />

∫ − 1 x<br />

tan<br />

2<br />

R<br />

−1<br />

x<br />

tan<br />

1<br />

R<br />

µ tan<br />

=<br />

∫ −<br />

0iR<br />

−<br />

4π<br />

tan<br />

1 x2<br />

R<br />

1 x1<br />

R<br />

R sec<br />

R<br />

3<br />

sec<br />

2<br />

2<br />

φ<br />

φ<br />

cosφ<br />

dφ<br />

...(ii)<br />

µ 0 iR ⎡ ⎛ −1<br />

x 2 ⎞ ⎛ −1<br />

x1<br />

⎞⎤<br />

= ⎢sin⎜<br />

tan ⎟ − sin⎜<br />

tan ⎟⎥ ...(iii)<br />

4π<br />

⎣ ⎝ R ⎠ ⎝ R ⎠ ⎦<br />

Let, z = tan –1 ⎛ x ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ ,<br />

⎝ R ⎠<br />

x<br />

Thus, tan z = R<br />

⇒<br />

sin z<br />

1−<br />

sin<br />

2<br />

z<br />

= R<br />

x<br />

⇒ R 2 sin 2 z = x 2 (1 – sin 2 z)<br />

⇒ sin 2 z(R 2 + x 2 ) = x 2<br />

⇒ sin z =<br />

x<br />

2<br />

x<br />

+ R<br />

⎛<br />

⇒ z = sin –1 ⎟ ⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜ x<br />

⎜<br />

⎝ x 2 + R<br />

2 ⎠<br />

2<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 24 DECEMBER 2009


Hence, equation (iii) becomes<br />

µ<br />

⎡<br />

⎤<br />

0i<br />

B = ⎢<br />

x 2 x1<br />

− ⎥ ...(iv)<br />

4πR<br />

⎢ 2 2 2 2 ⎥<br />

⎣ x 2 + R x1<br />

+ R ⎦<br />

Applying the equation (iv) to the given problem<br />

For AB, we get<br />

⎛ 3 ⎞ a a<br />

x 1 = – ⎜ ⎟ a, x2 = and R =<br />

⎝ 4 ⎠ 9 4<br />

Hence, B 1 =<br />

For BC :<br />

⎡<br />

⎢<br />

µ 0i<br />

⎢<br />

⎛ a ⎞ ⎢<br />

4π⎜<br />

⎟ ⎢<br />

⎝ 4 ⎠ ⎢⎣<br />

a<br />

4<br />

2 2<br />

a a<br />

+<br />

16 16<br />

µ<br />

= 0 i ⎛ 1 3<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜ +<br />

πa<br />

⎝ 2 10 ⎠<br />

− a 3a<br />

x 1 = , x2 =<br />

4 4<br />

This also gives<br />

For CD :<br />

∴ Β 3 =<br />

For DA :<br />

µ<br />

B 2 = 0 i ⎛ 1 3<br />

⎜ +<br />

πa<br />

⎝ 2 10<br />

x 1 = 4<br />

a , x2 =<br />

⎡<br />

⎢<br />

µ 0i<br />

⎢<br />

⎛ − 3a ⎞ ⎢<br />

4π⎜<br />

⎟ ⎢<br />

⎝ 4 ⎠ ⎢⎣<br />

−3a<br />

4<br />

= µ i ⎡ 1 1 ⎤<br />

0<br />

⎢ + ⎥<br />

3πa<br />

⎣ 10 2 ⎦<br />

x 1 =<br />

−<br />

and R = 4<br />

a<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎠<br />

and R =<br />

− 3a<br />

4<br />

2 2<br />

9a 9a<br />

+<br />

16 16<br />

−<br />

3 a −a<br />

3a<br />

, x2 = and R =<br />

4 4 4<br />

⎛ − 3 ⎞ ⎤<br />

⎜ ⎟a<br />

⎥<br />

⎝ 4 ⎠ ⎥<br />

2 2 ⎥<br />

9a a<br />

+ ⎥<br />

16 16 ⎥⎦<br />

−3a<br />

4<br />

a<br />

⎤<br />

⎥<br />

4 ⎥<br />

2 2 ⎥<br />

a 9a<br />

+ ⎥<br />

16 16 ⎥⎦<br />

This also gives B 4 = µ i ⎡ 1 1 ⎤<br />

0<br />

⎢ + ⎥<br />

3πa<br />

⎣ 10 2 ⎦<br />

Total magnitude at magnetic field,<br />

B = B 1 + B 2 + B 3 + B 4<br />

= µ i ⎡ 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 ⎤<br />

0<br />

⎢ + + + + + + + ⎥<br />

πa<br />

⎣ 2 10 2 10 3 10 3 2 3 10 3 2 ⎦<br />

2µ<br />

= 0 i<br />

( 10 + 2 2)<br />

3πa<br />

= 2.0 × 10 4 T<br />

MEMORABLE POINTS<br />

• Can a current be measured by a voltameter ?<br />

Yes, direct current can be<br />

measured by a voltameter<br />

• The equivalent resistance of n resistances each equal to r<br />

and connected in parallel is given by<br />

r/n<br />

• Repeated use of which digital gate or gates can<br />

produce all the three basic gates (OR, AND and<br />

NOT)<br />

NAND gate and NOR gate<br />

• What is Turnbull's blue ? Fe 4 [Fe(CN) 6 ] 3<br />

• An hypothesis tested by experiments is known as<br />

Theory<br />

• What is magnesia alba ? Mg(OH) 2 .MgCO 3 .3 H 2 O<br />

• The humidity of air is measured by<br />

Hygrometer<br />

• What is oleum ? H 2 S 2 O 7<br />

Also known as fuming sulphuric acid<br />

• Vulcanised rubber was invented by<br />

Charies Goodyear (1839)<br />

• An amino acid which does not contain a chiral<br />

centre.<br />

Glycine [NH 2 –CH 2 –COOH]<br />

• Scientist who perfected the technique for converting<br />

pig iron into steel. Hynry Besemer (1856)<br />

• When the pH of the blood is lower than the normal<br />

value, this condition is known as Acidosis<br />

• The electrolytic method of obtaining aluminium<br />

from bauxite was first developed by<br />

Charles Hall (1886)<br />

• Which compound possesses characteristic smell like<br />

that of mustard oil ?<br />

Ethyl isothiocyanate [C 2 H 5 N = C = S]<br />

• First solar battery was developed in the<br />

Bell Telephone Laboratory (1954)<br />

• What is Wilkinson's catalyst ?<br />

tris (triphenylphosphine) chlororhodlum (I)<br />

• In 1836 the galvanised iron was introduced first in<br />

France<br />

• What is caro's acid ?<br />

Permonosulphuric acid [H 2 SO 5 ]<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 25 DECEMBER 2009


PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Reflection at plane & curved surfaces<br />

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY<br />

Key Concepts :<br />

(a) Due to reflection, none of frequency, wavelength<br />

and speed of light change.<br />

(b) Law of reflection :<br />

Incident ray, reflected ray and normal on incident<br />

point are coplanar.<br />

The angle of incidence is equal to angle of<br />

reflection<br />

Incident n Reflected<br />

Ray Ray<br />

θ θ<br />

Plane surface<br />

Convex<br />

surface<br />

n<br />

α α<br />

n<br />

Tangent<br />

θ θ<br />

at point P<br />

P<br />

Convex surface<br />

A<br />

Tangent<br />

at point P<br />

Some important points : In case of plane mirror<br />

For real object, image is virtual.<br />

For virtual object, image is real.<br />

The converging point of incident beam behaves as a<br />

object.<br />

If incident beam on optical instrument (mirror, lens<br />

etc) is converging in nature, object is virtual.<br />

If incident beam on optical instrument is diverging in<br />

nature, the object is real.<br />

The converging point of reflected or refracted beam<br />

from an optical instrument behaves as image.<br />

If reflected beam or refracted beam from an optical<br />

instrument is converging in nature, image is real.<br />

P<br />

Virtual<br />

Object<br />

P<br />

Real<br />

Object<br />

P<br />

Real<br />

Object<br />

n<br />

n<br />

P<br />

Virual<br />

Object<br />

If reflected beam or refracted beam from an optical<br />

instrument is diverging in nature, image is virtual.<br />

For solving the problem, the reference frame is<br />

chosen in which optical instrument (mirror, lens, etc.)<br />

is in rest.<br />

The formation of image and size of image is<br />

independent of size of mirror.<br />

Visual region and intensity of image depend on size<br />

of mirror.<br />

P<br />

n<br />

If the plane mirror is rotated through an angle θ, the<br />

reflected ray and image is rotated through an angle 2θ<br />

in the same sense.<br />

If mirror is cut into a number of pieces, then the focal<br />

length does not change.<br />

The minimum height of mirror required to see the full<br />

image of a man of height h is h/2.<br />

Object<br />

vsinθ<br />

Object<br />

Object<br />

v<br />

Rest<br />

v<br />

θ<br />

vcosθ<br />

v<br />

v<br />

θ<br />

θ<br />

α<br />

α<br />

Image<br />

Rest<br />

vsinθ<br />

vcosθ Image<br />

v m<br />

2v m –v<br />

Image<br />

P'<br />

P<br />

n<br />

Real<br />

n<br />

Object<br />

α<br />

α<br />

α<br />

α<br />

P'<br />

Virual<br />

Object<br />

Object<br />

In rest<br />

v m<br />

Image<br />

2v m<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 26 DECEMBER 2009


Object<br />

v<br />

v m<br />

2v m +v<br />

Image<br />

(c) Number of images formed by combination of<br />

two plane mirrors : The images formed by<br />

combination of two plane mirror are lying on a<br />

circle whose centre is at the meeting points of<br />

mirrors. Also, object is lying on that circle.<br />

360º<br />

Here, n =<br />

θ<br />

where θ = angle between mirrors.<br />

360º<br />

If is even number, the number of images is<br />

θ<br />

n – 1.<br />

360º<br />

If θ<br />

is odd number and object is placed on<br />

bisector of angle between mirror, then number of<br />

images is n – 1.<br />

360º<br />

If is odd and object is not situated on<br />

θ<br />

bisector of angle between mirrors, then the<br />

number of images is equal to n.<br />

(d) Law of reflection in vector form :<br />

Let ê 1 = unit vector along incident ray.<br />

ê 2 = unit vector along reflected ray<br />

nˆ = unit vector along normal on point of<br />

Incidence<br />

Then ê 2 =<br />

ê 2(ê1<br />

1 −<br />

n<br />

nˆ<br />

.nˆ ) nˆ<br />

ê1<br />

ê 2<br />

(e) Spherical mirrors :<br />

It easy to solve the problems in geometrical optics<br />

by the help of co-ordinate sign convention.<br />

x'<br />

y<br />

y'<br />

y<br />

x<br />

x'<br />

y<br />

y'<br />

x' x x'<br />

y'<br />

y'<br />

1 1<br />

The mirror formula is +<br />

v u<br />

Also, R = 2f<br />

y<br />

x<br />

x<br />

=<br />

1<br />

f<br />

x'<br />

y<br />

y'<br />

x<br />

These formulae are only applicable for paraxial<br />

rays.<br />

All distances are measured from optical centre. It<br />

means optical centre is taken as origin.<br />

The sign conventions are only applicable in given<br />

values.<br />

The transverse magnification is<br />

image size −v<br />

β =<br />

=<br />

object size u<br />

1. If object and image both are real, β is negative.<br />

2. If object and image both are virtual, β is negative.<br />

3. If object is real but image is virtual, β is positive.<br />

4. If object is virtual but image is real, β is positive.<br />

5. Image of star; moon or distant object is formed at<br />

focus of mirror.<br />

If y = the distance of sun or moon from earth.<br />

D = diameter of moon or sun's disc<br />

f = focal length of the mirror<br />

d = diameter of the image<br />

θ = the angle subtended by sun or moon's disc<br />

D d<br />

Then tan θ = θ = = y f<br />

Here, θ is in radian.<br />

Sun<br />

D<br />

d<br />

F<br />

Problem solving strategy :<br />

Image formation by mirrors<br />

Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts : There are<br />

two different and complementary ways to solve<br />

problems involving image formation by mirrors. One<br />

approach uses equations, while the other involves<br />

drawing a principle-ray diagram. A successful<br />

problem solution uses both approaches.<br />

Step 2: Set up the problem : Determine the target<br />

variables. The three key quantities are the focal<br />

length, object distance, and image distance; typically<br />

you'll be given two of these and will have to<br />

determine the third.<br />

Step 3: Execute the solution as follows :<br />

The principal-ray diagram is to geometric optics<br />

what the free-body diagram is to mechanics. In<br />

any problem involving image formation by a<br />

mirror, always draw a principal-ray diagram first<br />

if you have enough information. (The same<br />

θ<br />

θ<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 27 DECEMBER 2009


advice should be followed when dealing with<br />

lenses in the following sections.)<br />

It is usually best to orient your diagrams<br />

consistently with the incoming rays traveling<br />

from left to right. Don't draw a lot of other rays at<br />

random ; stick with the principal rays, the ones<br />

you know something about. Use a ruler and<br />

measure distance carefully ! A freehand sketch<br />

will not give good results.<br />

If your principal rays don't converge at a real<br />

image point, you may have to extend them<br />

straight backward to locate a virtual image point,<br />

as figure (b). We recommend drawing the<br />

extensions with broken lines. Another useful aid<br />

is to color-code the different principal rays, as is<br />

done in figure(a) & (b).<br />

Q<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

P<br />

4<br />

3<br />

I<br />

2<br />

4<br />

1<br />

4<br />

2 2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

(b)<br />

4<br />

C<br />

1<br />

3<br />

(a)<br />

v<br />

P'<br />

Q'<br />

F<br />

Q'<br />

3<br />

P' F<br />

1 1 1<br />

Check your results using Eq. + = and the<br />

s s' f<br />

y'<br />

s'<br />

magnification equation m = = − . The<br />

y s<br />

results you find using this equation must be<br />

consistent with your principal-ray diagram; if not,<br />

double-check both your calculation and your<br />

diagram.<br />

Pay careful attention to signs on object and image<br />

distances, radii or curvature, and object and image<br />

heights. A negative sign on any of these<br />

quantities always has significance. Use the<br />

equations and the sign rules carefully and<br />

consistently, and they will tell you the truth !<br />

Note that the same sign rules (given in section)<br />

work for all four cases in this chapter : reflection<br />

and refraction from plane and spherical surfaces.<br />

Step 4: Evaluate your answer : You've already<br />

checked your results by using both diagrams and<br />

equations. But it always helps to take a look back<br />

and ask yourself. "Do these results make sense ?".<br />

v<br />

C<br />

1. How will you arrange the two mirrors so that<br />

whatever may be the angle of incidence, the incident<br />

ray and the reflected ray from the two mirrors will be<br />

parallel to each other.<br />

Sol.<br />

B<br />

A<br />

Solved Examples<br />

θ<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

i 1 i 2<br />

i 1 i 2<br />

The total deviation of the ray is given by<br />

δ =180 – 2i 1 + 180 – 2i 2<br />

= 360 – 2(i 1 + i 2 )<br />

For the resultant ray to be parallel, δ should be 180º<br />

∴ 360 – 2(i 1 + i 2 ) = 180<br />

i.e., i 1 + i 2 = 90º<br />

From the geometry of the figure i 1 + i 2 = θ<br />

θ Angle between the mirrors should be 90º.<br />

2. Rays of light strike a horizontal plane mirror at an<br />

angle of 45º. At what angle should a second plane<br />

mirror be placed in order that the reflected ray finally<br />

be reflected horizontally from the second mirror.<br />

Sol. The situation is shown in figure<br />

C G<br />

A<br />

S θ θ<br />

D<br />

P<br />

45º<br />

45º<br />

B<br />

N<br />

Q<br />

The ray AB strikes the first plane mirror PQ at an<br />

angle of 45º. Now, we suppose that the second<br />

mirror SG is arranged such that the ray BC after<br />

reflection from this mirror is horizontal.<br />

From the figure we see that emergent ray CD is<br />

parallel to PQ and BC is a line intersecting these<br />

parallel lines.<br />

So, ∠DCE = ∠CBQ = 180º<br />

∠DCN + ∠NCB + ∠CBQ = 180º<br />

θ + θ + 45º = 180º ∴ θ = 67.5º<br />

As ∠NCS = 90º, therefore the second mirror should<br />

be inclined to the horizontal at an angle 22.5º.<br />

3. An object is placed exactly midway between a<br />

concave mirror of radius of curvature 40 cm and a<br />

convex mirror of radius of curvature 30 cm. The<br />

mirrors face each other and are 50 cm apart.<br />

Determine the nature and position of the image<br />

formed by the successive reflections, first at the<br />

concave mirror and then at the convex mirror.<br />

C<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 28 DECEMBER 2009


Sol. The image formation is shown in figure.<br />

I 1<br />

I 2<br />

P 2 C<br />

r = 30 cm<br />

50cm<br />

F<br />

25cm<br />

P 1<br />

r = 40 cm<br />

(i) For concave mirror,<br />

u 1 = 25 cm, f 1 = 20 cm and v 1 = ?<br />

1 1 1<br />

Now = +<br />

f 1 u1 v1<br />

1 1 1<br />

or = +<br />

20 25 v1<br />

v 1 = 100 cm.<br />

As v 1 is positive, hence the image is real. In the<br />

absence of convex mirror, the rays after reflection<br />

from concave mirror would have formed a real image<br />

I 1 at distance 100 cm from the mirror. Due to the<br />

presence of convex mirror, the rays are reflected and<br />

appear to come from I 2 .<br />

(ii) For convex mirror,<br />

In this case, I 1 acts as virtual object and I 2 is the<br />

virtual image.<br />

The distance of the virtual object from the convex<br />

mirror is 100 – 50 = 50 cm. Hence u 2 = –50 cm.<br />

As focal length of convex mirror is negative and<br />

hence f 2 = –30/2 = –15 cm. Here we shall calculate<br />

the value of v 2 . Using the mirror formula, we have<br />

1 1 1<br />

− = − +<br />

15 50 v 2<br />

or v 2 = –21.42 cm<br />

As v 2 is negative, image is virtual. So image is<br />

formed behind the convex mirror at a distance of<br />

21.43 cm.<br />

4. A convex and a concave mirror each 30 cm in radius<br />

are placed opposite to each other 60 cm apart on the<br />

same axis. An object 5 cm in height is placed<br />

midway between them. Find the position and size of<br />

the image formed by reflection, first at convex and<br />

then at the concave mirror.<br />

Sol. The image formation is shown in figure.<br />

P 2<br />

I 2<br />

O<br />

P 1 I 1<br />

r = 30 cm r = 30 cm<br />

(i) For convex mirror,<br />

u 1 = +30 m, f 1 = –15 cm and v 1 = ?<br />

1 1 1<br />

∴ − = +<br />

15 50 v 1<br />

or v 1 = –10 cm<br />

The image will be virtual. This is formed at I 1 behind<br />

the convex mirror at a distance of 10 cm. The image<br />

I 1 acts as an object for convex mirror.<br />

(ii) For concave mirror,<br />

u 2 = P 2 I 1 = 60 + 10 = 70 cm,<br />

f 2 = +15 cm and v 2 = ?<br />

1 1 1<br />

∴ = +<br />

15 70 v2<br />

Solving we get, v 2 = (210/11) cm.<br />

As v 2 is positive, the image I 2 is formed in front of<br />

concave mirror at a distance of (210/11) cm.<br />

Magnification m 1 for first reflection<br />

v 1 10 1<br />

= = =<br />

u1<br />

30 3<br />

Magnification m 2 for second reflection<br />

v 2 (210/11) 3<br />

= = =<br />

u 2 70 11<br />

1 3 1<br />

Final magnification = m 1 × m 2 = × = 3 11 11<br />

∴ Size of the image = 5 × 11<br />

1 = 11<br />

5<br />

5. An object is placed infront of a convex mirror at a<br />

distance of 50 cm. A plane mirror is introduced<br />

covering the lower half of the convex mirror. If the<br />

distance between the object and the plane mirror is 30<br />

cm it is found that there is no parallex between the<br />

images formed by the two mirrors. What is the<br />

radius of curvature of the convex mirror ?<br />

Sol. Let O be the object placed infront of a convex mirror<br />

MM' at a distance of 50 cm as shown in figure. The<br />

distance of the plane mirror NN' from the object is<br />

30. We know that in a plane mirror the image is<br />

formed behind the mirror at the same distance as the<br />

object infront of it. It is also given that there is no<br />

parallax between the images formed by the two<br />

mirrors, i.e., the image is formed at a distance of 30<br />

cm behind the plane mirror.<br />

For convex mirror,<br />

u = 50 cm, v = 10 cm [Q QP = QN – PN]<br />

as v is negative in convex mirror.<br />

M<br />

Q<br />

M'<br />

P<br />

20cm<br />

50cm<br />

N<br />

N'<br />

30cm<br />

O<br />

1 1 1<br />

Using the mirror formula = + , we have<br />

f u v<br />

1 1 1 4<br />

50<br />

= − = − , ∴ f = −<br />

f 50 10 50<br />

4<br />

50×2<br />

Now v = 2f = − = –25 m<br />

4<br />

The radius of curvature of convex mirror is 25 cm.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 29 DECEMBER 2009


PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Fluid Mechanics<br />

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY<br />

Hydrostatics :<br />

Pressure at a point inside a Liquid : p = p 0 + ρgh<br />

where p 0 is the atmospheric pressure, ρ is the density<br />

of the liquid and h is the depth of the point below the<br />

free surface.<br />

h<br />

p<br />

p 0<br />

ρ<br />

Hydrodynamics :<br />

Bernoulli's Theorem : 2<br />

1 v 2 + gh + ρ<br />

p = a constant<br />

for a streamline flow of a fluid (liquid or gas).<br />

Here, v is the velocity of the fluid, h is its height<br />

above some horizontal level, p is the pressure and ρ<br />

is the density.<br />

p 1<br />

v 1<br />

p 2<br />

h 2<br />

h 1<br />

v 2<br />

Pressure is a Scalar : The unit of pressure may be<br />

atmosphere or cm of mercury. These are derived<br />

units. The absolute unit of pressure is Nm –2 . Normal<br />

atmospheric pressure, i.e, 76 cm of mercury, is<br />

approximately equal to 10 5 Nm –2 .<br />

Thrust : Thrust = pressure × area. Thrust has the unit<br />

of force.<br />

Laws of liquid pressure<br />

(a) A liquid at rest exerts pressure equally in all<br />

directions.<br />

(b) Pressure at two points on the same horizontal line<br />

in a liquid at rest is the same.<br />

(c) Pressure exerted at a point in a confined liquid at<br />

rest is transmitted equally in all directions and<br />

acts normally on the wall of the containing vessel.<br />

This is called Pascal's law. A hydraulic press<br />

works on this principle of transmission of<br />

pressure.<br />

The principle of floating bodies (law of flotation) is<br />

that W = W´, that is, weight of body = weight of<br />

displaced liquid or buoyant force. The weight of the<br />

displaced liquid is also called buoyancy or upthrust.<br />

Hydrometers work on the principle of floating<br />

bodies. This principle may also be applied to gases<br />

(e.g., a balloon).<br />

Liquids and gases are together called fluids. The<br />

important difference between them is that liquids<br />

cannot be compressed, while gases can be<br />

compressed. Hence, the density of a liquid is the<br />

same everywhere and does not depend on its<br />

pressure. In the case of a gas, however, the density is<br />

proportional to the pressure.<br />

v 2 > v 1 p 2 < p 1<br />

According to this principle, the greater the velocity,<br />

the lower is the pressure in a fluid flow.<br />

It would be useful to remember that in liquid flow,<br />

the volume of liquid flowing past any point per<br />

second is the same for every point. Therefore, when<br />

the cross-section of the tube decreases, the velocity<br />

increases.<br />

Note : Density = relative density<br />

or specific gravity × 1000 kg m –3 .<br />

Surface tension and surface energy :<br />

Surface Tension : The property due to which a<br />

liquid surface tends to contract and occupy the<br />

minimum area is called the surface tension of the<br />

liquid. It is caused by forces of attraction between the<br />

molecules of the liquid. A molecule on the free<br />

surface of a liquid experiences a net resultant force<br />

which tends to draw it into the liquid. Surface tension<br />

is actually a manifestation of the forces experienced<br />

by the surface molecules.<br />

If an imaginary line is drawn on a liquid surface then<br />

the force acting per unit length of this line is defined<br />

as the surface tension. Its unit is, therefore, newton /<br />

metre. This force acts along the liquid surface. For<br />

curved surfaces, the force is tangent to the liquid<br />

surface at every point.<br />

Surface Energy : A liquid surface possesses<br />

potential energy due to surface tension. This energy<br />

per unit area of the surface is called the surface<br />

energy of the liquid. Its units is joule per square<br />

metre. The surface energy of a liquid has the same<br />

numerical values as the surface tension. The surface<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 30 DECEMBER 2009


tension of a liquid depends on temperature. It<br />

decreases with rise in temperature.<br />

Excess of Pressure : Inside a soap bubble or a gas<br />

bubble inside a liquid, there must be pressure in<br />

excess of the outside pressure to balance the tendency<br />

of the liquid surface to contract due to surface<br />

tension.<br />

⎛<br />

p(excess of pressure) = T<br />

⎜<br />

⎝<br />

1<br />

r<br />

1<br />

+<br />

1 r 2<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎠<br />

in general<br />

where T is surface tension of the liquid, and r 1 and r 2<br />

are the principal radii of curvature of the bubble in<br />

two mutually perpendicular directions.<br />

For a spherical soap bubble, r 1 = r 2 = r and there are<br />

two free surfaces of the liquid.<br />

4T<br />

∴ p = r<br />

For a gas bubble inside a liquid, r 1 = r 2 = r and there<br />

is only one surface.<br />

2T<br />

∴ p = r<br />

For a cylindrical surface r 1 = r and r 2 = ∞ and there<br />

are two surfaces.<br />

2T<br />

∴ p = r<br />

Angle of Contact : The angle made by the surface of<br />

a liquid with the solid surface inside of a liquid at the<br />

point of contact is called the angle of contact. It is at<br />

this angle that the surface tension acts on the wall of<br />

the container.<br />

The angle of contact θ depends on the natures of the<br />

liquid and solid in contact. If the liquid wets the solid<br />

(e.g., water and glass), the angle of contact is zero. In<br />

most cases, θ is acute (figure i). In the special case of<br />

mercury on glass, θ is obtuse (figure ii).<br />

θ<br />

fig. (i)<br />

θ<br />

fig. (ii)<br />

Rise of Liquid in a Capillary Tube : In a thin<br />

(capacity) tube, the free surface of the liquid becomes<br />

curved. The forces of surface tension at the edges of<br />

the liquid surface then acquire a vertical component.<br />

h<br />

T θ<br />

θ<br />

meniscus<br />

r<br />

θ<br />

θ<br />

T<br />

The upward force by which a liquid surface is pulled<br />

up in a capillary tube is 2πrTcos θ, and the downward<br />

force due to the gravitational pull on the mass of<br />

liquid in the tube is (πr2h + v)ρg, where v is the<br />

volume above the liquid meniscus. If θ = 0º, the<br />

meniscus is hemispherical in shape. Then v =<br />

difference between the volume of the cylinder of<br />

radius r and height r and the volume of the<br />

hemisphere of radius r<br />

= πr 3 – 3<br />

2 πr 3 = 3<br />

1 πr<br />

3<br />

When θ ≠ 0, we cannot calculate v which is generally<br />

very small and so it may be neglected. For<br />

equilibrium<br />

(πr 2 h + v) ρg = 2πrT cos θ<br />

When a glass capillary tube is dipper in mercury, the<br />

meniscus is convex, since the angle of contact is<br />

obtuse. The surface tension forces now acquire a<br />

downward component, and the level of mercury<br />

inside the tube the falls below the level outside it. the<br />

relation 2T cos θ = hρgr may be used to obtain the<br />

fall in the mercury level.<br />

Problem Solving Strategy<br />

Bernoulli's Equations :<br />

Bernoulli's equation is derived from the work-energy<br />

theorem, so it is not surprising that much of the<br />

problem-solving strategy suggested in W.E.P. also<br />

applicable here.<br />

Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts : First ensure<br />

that the fluid flow is steady and that fluid is<br />

incompressible and has no internal friction. This case<br />

is an idealization, but it hold up surprisingly well for<br />

fluids flowing through sufficiently large pipes and for<br />

flows within bulk fluids (e.g., air flowing around an<br />

airplane or water flowing around a fish).<br />

Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps<br />

Always begin by identifying clearly the points 1<br />

and 2 referred to in Bernoulli's equation.<br />

Define your coordinate system, particular the<br />

level at which y = 0.<br />

Make lists of the unknown and known quantities<br />

in Eq. p 1 + ρgy 1 + 2<br />

1<br />

ρv1 2 = p 2 + ρgy 2 + 2<br />

1<br />

ρv2<br />

2<br />

(Bernoulli's equation)<br />

The variables are p 1 , p 2 , v 1 , v 2 , y 1 and y 2 , and the<br />

constants are ρ and g. Decide which unknowns<br />

are your target variables.<br />

Step 3: Execute the solutions as follows : Write<br />

Bernoulli's equation and solve for the unknowns. In<br />

some problems you will need to use the continuity<br />

equation, Eq. A 1 v 1 = A 2 v 2 (continuity equation,<br />

incompressible fluid), to get a relation between the<br />

two speeds in terms of cross-sectional areas of pipes<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 31 DECEMBER 2009


or containers. Or perhaps you will know both speeds<br />

and need to determine one of the areas. You may also<br />

dV<br />

need to use Eq. = Av (volume flow rate) to find<br />

dt<br />

the volume flow rate.<br />

Step 4: Evaluate your answer : As always, verify that<br />

the results make physical sense. Double-check that<br />

you have used consistent units. In SI units, pressure is<br />

in pascals, density in kilograms per cubic meter, and<br />

speed in meters per second. Also note that the<br />

pressures must be either all absolute pressure or all<br />

gauge pressures.<br />

Solved Examples<br />

1. A vertical U-tube of uniform cross-section contains<br />

mercury in both arms. A glycerine (relative density<br />

1.3) column of length 10 cm is introduced into one of<br />

the arms. Oil of density 800 kg m –3 is poured into the<br />

other arm until the upper surface of the oil and<br />

glycerine are at the same horizontal level. Find the<br />

length of the oil column. Density of mercury is 13.6<br />

× 10 3 kg m –3 .<br />

Sol. Draw a horizontal line through the mercury-glycerine<br />

surface. This is a horizontal line in the same liquid at<br />

rest namely, mercury. Therefore, pressure at the<br />

points A and B must be the same.<br />

(1 – h)<br />

A<br />

h<br />

B<br />

10 cm<br />

Pressure at B<br />

= p 0 + 0.1 × (1.3 × 1000) × g<br />

Pressure at A<br />

= p 0 + h × 800 × g + (0.1 – h) × 13.6 × 1000g<br />

∴ p 0 + 0.1 × 1300 × g<br />

= p 0 + 800gh + 1360g – 13600 × g × h<br />

⇒ 130 = 800h + 1360 – 13600h<br />

1230<br />

⇒ h = = 0.096 m = 9.6 cm<br />

12800<br />

H<br />

x<br />

•1<br />

•2<br />

•3<br />

2<br />

p 0 1 +<br />

2 p 1<br />

v 1 + gH = +<br />

2<br />

v 2 + g (h – x)<br />

ρ 2 ρ 2<br />

p 0 1<br />

= +<br />

2<br />

v 3 + 0<br />

ρ 2<br />

By continuity equation<br />

v 1A 1 = A 2 v 2 = A 2 v 3<br />

Since A 1 >> A 2 ,v 1 is negligible and v 2 = v 3 = n (say).<br />

∴<br />

p p + gH =<br />

2 1 + v 2 + g (h – x)<br />

ρ 2<br />

0<br />

ρ<br />

p 0 1<br />

= + v<br />

2<br />

ρ 2<br />

∴ v = 2 gH<br />

(i)<br />

p 0 p<br />

and + gH =<br />

2 + gH + g (h – x)<br />

ρ ρ<br />

⇒ p 0 + p 2 + ρg (h – x)<br />

⇒ p 2 = p 0 – ρg (h – x) (ii)<br />

Thus pressure varies with distance from the upper<br />

end of the pipe according to equation (ii) and velocity<br />

is a constant and is given by (i).<br />

3. A rod of length 6m has a mass of 12 kg. It is hinged<br />

at one end at a distance of 3 m below the water<br />

surface.<br />

(i) What weight must be attached to the other end so<br />

that 5 m of the rod is submerged ?<br />

(ii) Find the magnitude and direction of the force<br />

exerted by the hinge on the rod. The specific gravity<br />

of the material of the rod is 0.5<br />

Sol. Mass per unit length of the rod is 2 kg. Therefore,<br />

mass of the submerged portion of the rod is 10 kg and<br />

10<br />

its volume = m 3 (using the simple formula,<br />

500<br />

mass<br />

volume = and density = specific gravity ×<br />

density<br />

h<br />

2. A liquid flows out of a broad vessel through a narrow<br />

vertical pipe. How are the pressure and the velocity<br />

of the liquid in the pipe distributed when the height<br />

of the liquid level in the vessel is H from the lower<br />

end of the length of the pipe is h ?<br />

Sol. Let us consider three points 1, 2, 3 in the flow of<br />

water. The positions of the points are as shown in the<br />

figure.<br />

Applying Bernoulli's theorem to points 1, 2 and 3<br />

1000 kg m –3 ).<br />

3m<br />

H<br />

A<br />

N<br />

F b<br />

θ<br />

O<br />

O´<br />

12 kgf<br />

C<br />

B<br />

W<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 32 DECEMBER 2009


Therefore, buoyant force<br />

10<br />

F b = × 1000 = 20 kgf<br />

500<br />

Let N and H be the vertical downward and horizontal<br />

reactions of the hinge on the rod. Considering<br />

horizontal and vertical translational equilibrium of<br />

the rod, N + 12 + W = 20 (where W is the weight to<br />

be attached and H = 0).<br />

N + W = 8 and H = 0 ..(i)<br />

Considering the rotational equilibrium of the rod<br />

about A<br />

–20 × g × 2.5 cos θ + 12 × g × 3 cos θ + W × 6 cos θ = 0<br />

⇒ 6W = 50g – 36g = 14g<br />

⇒ W = 3<br />

7 g = 3<br />

7 kgf<br />

7 17<br />

Ν = 8 – = kgf 3 3<br />

4. The end of a capillary tube with a radius r is<br />

immersed in water. Is mechanical energy conserved<br />

when the water rises in the tube ? The tube is<br />

sufficiently long. If not, calculate the energy change.<br />

Sol. In the equilibrium position (θ = 0º for pure water and<br />

glass)<br />

2πrT cos 0º = πr 2 hρg<br />

2T<br />

or h =<br />

ρgr<br />

2<br />

4πT<br />

Work done by surface tension = (2πrT) × h =<br />

ρg<br />

U, potential energy of water in the tube<br />

= (πr 2 hρ)gh/2; it is multiple by h/2 because the cg of<br />

the water in the capillary tube is at a height h/2.<br />

2<br />

2πT<br />

⇒ U =<br />

ρg<br />

Thus it is seen that the mechanical energy is not<br />

conserved.<br />

2 2<br />

4πT<br />

2πT<br />

∴ mechanical energy loss = –<br />

ρg<br />

ρg<br />

2πT<br />

=<br />

ρg<br />

This energy is converted into heat.<br />

5. Calculate the difference in water levels in two<br />

communicating tubes of diameter d = 1 mm and<br />

d = 1.5 mm. Surface tension of water = 0.07 Nm –1<br />

and angle of contact between glass and water = 0º.<br />

2T cosθ<br />

Sol. Pressure at A = p 0 –<br />

r 2<br />

(Q pressure inside a curved surface is greater than<br />

that outside)<br />

2T cosθ<br />

Pressure at B = p 0 –<br />

r 1<br />

2<br />

⎛<br />

∴ pressure difference = 2T cos θ<br />

⎜<br />

⎝<br />

B<br />

A<br />

1<br />

r<br />

1<br />

−<br />

1 r 2<br />

Let this pressure difference correspond to h units of<br />

the liquid.<br />

⎛ 1 1<br />

Then 2T cos θ ⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜ − = ρgh<br />

⎝ r1 r 2 ⎠<br />

2T cosθ<br />

⎛ 1 1<br />

⇒ h =<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜ −<br />

ρg<br />

⎝ r1 r 2 ⎠<br />

2×<br />

0.07 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞<br />

∴ h = ⎜ − ⎟ = 4.76 mm<br />

1000×<br />

9.8<br />

−3<br />

−3<br />

⎝1×<br />

10 1.5×<br />

10 ⎠<br />

Interesting Science Facts<br />

• The dinosaurs became extinct before the<br />

Rockies or the Alps were formed.<br />

• Female black widow spiders eat their males after<br />

mating.<br />

• When a flea jumps, the rate of acceleration is 20<br />

times that of the space shuttle during launch.<br />

• The earliest wine makers lived in Egypt around<br />

2300 BC.<br />

• If our Sun were just inch in diameter, the nearest<br />

star would be 445 miles away.<br />

• The Australian billy goat plum contains 100<br />

times more vitamin C than an orange.<br />

• Astronauts cannot belch - there is no gravity to<br />

separate liquid from gas in their stomachs.<br />

• The air at the summit of Mount Everest, 29,029<br />

feet is only a third as thick as the air at sea level.<br />

• One million, million, million, million, millionth of<br />

a second after the Big Bang the Universe was the<br />

size of a …pea.<br />

• DNA was first discovered in 1869 by Swiss<br />

Friedrich Mieschler.<br />

• The molecular structure of DNA was first<br />

determined by Watson and Crick in 1953.<br />

• The thermometer was invented in 1607 by<br />

Galileo.<br />

• Englishman Roger Bacon invented the magnifying<br />

glass in 1250.<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎠<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 33 DECEMBER 2009


KEY CONCEPT<br />

Organic<br />

Chemistry<br />

Fundamentals<br />

CARBOXYLIC ACID<br />

Acidity of carboxylic acids.<br />

Fatty acids are weak acids as compared to inorganic<br />

acids. The acidic character of fatty acids decreases<br />

with increase in molecular weight. Formic acid is the<br />

strongest of all fatty acids.<br />

The acidic character of carboxylic acids is due to<br />

resonance in the acidic group which imparts electron<br />

deficiency (positive charge) on the oxygen atom of<br />

the hydroxyl group (structure II).<br />

O<br />

R C O H<br />

I<br />

Non-equivalent structures<br />

O –<br />

R C<br />

+<br />

O H<br />

II<br />

(Resonance less important)<br />

O –<br />

R C O + H +<br />

The positive charge (electron deficiency) on oxygen<br />

atom causes a displacement of electron pair of the<br />

O—H bond towards the oxygen atom with the result<br />

the hydrogen atom of the O—H group is eliminated<br />

as proton and a carboxylate ion is formed.<br />

Once the carboxylate ion is formed, it is stabilised by<br />

means of resonance.<br />

O<br />

O –<br />

R C<br />

R C<br />

O – O<br />

Resonating forms of carboxylate ion (Equivalent structures)<br />

(Resonance more important)<br />

R<br />

C<br />

O<br />

O<br />

Resonance hybrid of carboxylate ion<br />

Due to equivalent resonating structures, resonance in<br />

carboxylate anion is more important than in the<br />

parent carboxylic acid. Hence carboxylate anion is<br />

more stabilised than the acid itself and hence the<br />

equilibrium of the ionisation of carboxylic acids to<br />

the right hand side.<br />

RCOOH RCOO – + H +<br />

The existence of resonance in carboxylate ion is<br />

supported by bond lengths. For example, in formic<br />

acid, there is one C=O double bond (1.23 Å) and one<br />

C—O single bond (1.36Å), while in sodium formate<br />

both of the carbon-oxygen bond lengths are identical<br />

–<br />

(1.27Å) which is nearly intermediate between C O<br />

and C—O bond length values. This proves resonance<br />

in carboxylate anion.<br />

H<br />

C<br />

O<br />

Formic acid<br />

OH<br />

H<br />

C<br />

O<br />

O<br />

–<br />

Sodium formate<br />

Na +<br />

It is important to note that although carboxylic acids<br />

and alcohols both contain –OH group, the latter are<br />

not acidic in nature. It is due to the absence of<br />

resonance (factor responsible for acidic character of<br />

–COOH) in both the alcohols as well as in their<br />

corresponding ions (alkoxide ions).<br />

R—O—H R—O – + H +<br />

Alcohol<br />

Alkoxide ion<br />

(No resonance)<br />

(No resonance)<br />

Relative acidic character of carboxylic acids with<br />

common species not having —COOH group.<br />

RCOOH > Ar—OH > HOH > ROH ><br />

HC CH > NH 3 > RH<br />

Effect of Substituents on acidity.<br />

The carboxylic acids are acidic in nature because of<br />

stabilisation (i.e., dispersal of negative charge) of<br />

carboxylate ion. So any factor which can enhance the<br />

dispersal of negative charge of the carboxylate ion<br />

will increase the acidity of the carboxylic acid and<br />

vice versa. Thus electron-withdrawing substitutents<br />

(like halogens, —NO 2 , —C 6 H 5 , etc.) would disperse<br />

the negative charge and hence stabilise the<br />

carboxylate ion and thus increase acidity of the<br />

parent acid. On the other hand, electron-releasing<br />

substituents would increase the negative charge,<br />

destabilise the carboxylate ion and thus decrease<br />

acidity of the parent acid.<br />

X<br />

C<br />

The substituent X withdraws electrons, disperses negative<br />

charge, stabilises the ion and hence increases acidity<br />

–<br />

O<br />

Y C<br />

O<br />

The substituent Y releases electrons, intensifies negative<br />

charge, destabilises the ion and hence decreases acidity<br />

O<br />

O<br />

–<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 34 DECEMBER 2009


Now, since alkyl groups are electron-releasing, their<br />

presence in the molecule will decrease the acidity. In<br />

general, greater the length of the alkyl chain, lower<br />

shall be the acidity of the acid. Thus, formic acid<br />

(HCOOH), having no alkyl group, is about 10 times<br />

stronger than acetic acid (CH 3 COOH) which in turn<br />

is stronger than propanoic acid (CH 3 CH 2 COOH) and<br />

so on. Similarly, following order is observed in<br />

chloro acids.<br />

Cl<br />

Cl<br />

Cl<br />

C<br />

CO 2 H > Cl<br />

Cl<br />

H<br />

pKa 0.70 1.48<br />

H<br />

> Cl<br />

C<br />

C<br />

CO 2 H<br />

CO 2 H > H<br />

H<br />

H<br />

pKa 2.86 4.76<br />

Decreasing order of aliphatic acids<br />

(i) O 2 NCH 2 COOH > FCH 2 COOH > ClCH 2 COOH<br />

> BrCH 2 COOH<br />

(ii) HCOOH > CH 3 COOH > (CH 3 ) 2 CHCOOH<br />

> (CH 3 ) 3 CCOOH<br />

(iii) CH 3 CH 2 CCl 2 COOH > CH 3 CHCl.CHCl.COOH<br />

> ClCH 2 CHClCH 2 COOH<br />

(iv) F 3 CCOOH > Cl 3 CCOOH > Br 3 CCOOH<br />

Benzoic acid is somewhat stronger than simple<br />

aliphatic acids. Here the carboxylate group is<br />

attached to a more electronegative carbon (sp 2<br />

hybridised) than in aliphatic acids (sp 3 hybridised).<br />

HCOOH > C 6 H 5 COOH > CH 3 COOH.<br />

Nucleophilic substitution at acyl carbon :<br />

It is important to note that nucleophilic substitution<br />

(e.g., hydrolysis, reaction with NH 3 , C 2 H 5 OH, etc.) in<br />

acid derivatives (acid chlorides, anhydrides, esters<br />

and amides) takes place at acyl carbon atom<br />

(difference from nucleophilic substitution in alkyl<br />

halides where substitution takes place at alkyl carbon<br />

atom). Nucleophilic substitution in acyl halides is<br />

faster than in alkyl halides. This is due to the<br />

presence of > CO group in acid chlorides which<br />

facilitate the release of halogen as halide ion.<br />

O δ–<br />

R C Cl<br />

δ–<br />

δ+<br />

Acid chloride<br />

R δ+ δ–<br />

Cl<br />

Alkyl chloride<br />

H<br />

C<br />

CO 2 H<br />

Comparison of nucleophilic substitution (e.g.,<br />

hydrolysis) in acid derivatives. Let us first study the<br />

mechanism of such reaction.<br />

R<br />

O<br />

C Z + Nu (i) Addition step R<br />

O<br />

C Nu<br />

Z<br />

(ii) Elimination step<br />

R<br />

O<br />

C Nu + Z<br />

(where Z= —Cl, —OCOR, —OR, —NH 2 and Nu =<br />

A nucleophile)<br />

Nucleophilic substitution in acid derivatives<br />

O<br />

O<br />

OH<br />

R C R'<br />

Nu<br />

R C<br />

H<br />

Nu<br />

R C Nu<br />

R'<br />

R'<br />

(where R' = H or alkyl group)<br />

Nucleophilic addition on aldehydes and ketones<br />

The (i) step is similar to that of nucleophilic addition<br />

in aldehydes and ketones and favoured by the<br />

presence of electron withdrawing group (which<br />

would stabilise the intermediate by developing<br />

negative charge) and hindered by electron-releasing<br />

group. The (ii) step (elimination of the leaving group<br />

Z) depends upon the ability of Z to accommodate<br />

electron pair, i.e., on the basicity of the leaving<br />

group. Weaker bases are good leaving groups,<br />

hence weaker a base, the more easily it is removed.<br />

Among the four leaving groups (Cl – , – OCOR, – OR,<br />

and – NH 2 ) of the four acid derivatives, Cl – being the<br />

weakest base is eliminated most readily. The relative<br />

order of the basic nature of the four groups is<br />

– NH 2 > – OR > – O.COR > Cl –<br />

Hence acid chlorides are most reactive and acid<br />

amides are the least reactive towards nucleophilic<br />

acyl substitution. Thus, the relative reactivity of acid<br />

derivatives (acyl compounds) towards nucleophilic<br />

substitution reactions is<br />

ROCl > RCO.O.COR > RCOOR > RCONH 2<br />

Acid Acid Esters Acid<br />

chlorides anhydrides amides<br />

OH – being stronger base than Cl – , carboxylic acids<br />

(RCOOH) undergo nucleophilic substitution<br />

(esterfication) less readily than acid chlorides.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 35 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 36 DECEMBER 2009


CAREER POINT’ s<br />

Correspondence & Test Series Courses Information<br />

Courses of <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

COURSE<br />

INFORMATION<br />

Eligibiltiy for<br />

Admission<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

All India Test<br />

Series <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER)<br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

Postal All India<br />

Test Series<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

Major Test Series<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER)<br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

Postal Major Test<br />

Series <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong><br />

<strong>2010</strong><br />

(By PO ST)<br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

CP Ranker's<br />

Package<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or<br />

12th pass<br />

students<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011<br />

Class 11th<br />

students<br />

All India Foundation<br />

Test Series <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong><br />

2011 (AT CENTER)<br />

Class 11th<br />

students<br />

Postal All India<br />

Test Series<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011<br />

Class 11th<br />

students<br />

Medium English OR Hindi English English English English English English OR Hindi English English<br />

Test Center Postal Visit our website Postal<br />

Issue of<br />

Application Kit<br />

Date of Dispatch/<br />

First Test<br />

Course Fee<br />

COURSE<br />

INFORMATION<br />

Eligibiltiy for<br />

Admission<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs.8,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

AIEEE <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

25-Oct-09<br />

Rs. 3,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 1,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

All India<br />

Test Series<br />

AIEEE <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER)<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

For Class 12th / 12th Pass Students<br />

Visit our<br />

website<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Rs. 1,550/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Postal Postal Postal Visit our website Postal<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Onwards<br />

Rs. 700/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Courses of AIEEE<br />

Postal All India Test<br />

Series<br />

AIEEE <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Major Test Series<br />

AIEEE <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER)<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 850/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 9,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Postal Major Test<br />

Series<br />

AIEEE <strong>2010</strong><br />

(BY POST)<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

For Class 11th Students<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

25-Oct-09<br />

Rs. 4,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

CP Ranker's Package<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 2,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

For Class 11th<br />

Students<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

AIEEE 2011<br />

Class 11th<br />

students<br />

Medium English OR Hindi English/Hindi English/Hindi English/Hindi English/Hindi English English OR Hindi<br />

Test Center Postal Visit our website Postal Visit our website Postal Postal Postal<br />

Issue of<br />

Application Kit<br />

Date of Dispatch/<br />

First Test<br />

Course Fee<br />

COURSE<br />

INFORMATION<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 7,500/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

Pre-Medical <strong>2010</strong><br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

25-Oct-09<br />

Rs. 4,000/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

All India Test Series<br />

Pre-Medical <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER)<br />

For Class 12th / 12th Pass Students<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 1450/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Rs. 1000/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Courses of Pre-Medical<br />

For Class 12th / 12th Pass Students<br />

Postal Test<br />

Series<br />

Pre-Medical <strong>2010</strong><br />

Major Test Series<br />

Pre-Medical <strong>2010</strong><br />

(AT CENTER )<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Onwards<br />

Rs. 550/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Postal Major Test<br />

Series Pre-Medical<br />

<strong>2010</strong> (BY POST)<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 850/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

CP Ranker's Package<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Rs. 8,500/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

For Class 11th<br />

Students<br />

Study Material<br />

Package<br />

Pre-Medical 2011<br />

Eligibiltiy for<br />

Admission<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 12th or 12th<br />

pass students<br />

Class 11th<br />

students<br />

Medium English OR Hindi English/ Hindi English/ Hindi English/ Hindi English English English OR Hindi<br />

Test Center<br />

Postal<br />

Visit our wesite for<br />

list of test centers<br />

Postal<br />

Visit our wesite for<br />

list of test centers<br />

Postal Postal Postal<br />

Issue of<br />

Application Kit<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Date of Dispatch<br />

Commencement /<br />

First Test<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

25-Oct-09<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Dispatch<br />

17-Jan-10<br />

Onwards<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Immediate<br />

Dispatch<br />

Course Fee<br />

Rs.7,200/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Rs. 3,600/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Rs. 1400/-<br />

including S. Tax<br />

Rs. 1100/- including<br />

S. Tax<br />

Rs. 600/- including<br />

S. Tax<br />

Rs. 900/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

Rs. 8,000/-<br />

including S.Tax<br />

◆For details about all Correspondence & Test Series Course Information, please visit our website.: www.careerpointgroup.com<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 37 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 38 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 39 DECEMBER 2009


KEY CONCEPT<br />

Physical<br />

Chemistry<br />

Fundamentals<br />

CHEMICAL KINETICS<br />

The temperature dependence of reaction rates :<br />

The rate constants of most reactions increase as the<br />

temperature is raised. Many reactions in solution fall<br />

somewhere in the range spanned by the hydrolysis of<br />

methyl ethanoate (where the rate constant at 35ºC is<br />

1.82 times that at 25ºC) and the hydrolysis of sucrose<br />

(where the factor is 4.13).<br />

(a) The Arrhenius parameters :<br />

It is found experimentally for many reactions that a<br />

plot of ln k against 1/T gives a straight line. This<br />

behaviour is normally expressed mathematically by<br />

introducing two parameters, one representing the<br />

intercept and the other the slope of the straight line,<br />

and writing the Arrhenius equaion.<br />

E<br />

ln k = ln A – a<br />

......(i)<br />

RT<br />

The parameter A, which corresponds to the intercept<br />

of the line at 1/T = 0(at infinite temperature, shown in<br />

figure), is called the pre-exponential factor or the<br />

'frequency factor'. The parameter E a , which is<br />

obtained from the slope of the line (–E a /R), is called<br />

the activation energy. Collectively the two quantities<br />

are called the Arrhenius parameters.<br />

ln k<br />

ln A<br />

Slope = –E a /R<br />

behaviour is a signal that the reaction has a complex<br />

mechanism.<br />

The temperature dependence of some reactions is<br />

non-Arrhenius, in the sense that a straight line is not<br />

obtained when ln k is plotted against 1/T. However,<br />

it is still possible to define an activation energy at any<br />

temperature as<br />

E a = RT 2 ⎛ dln k ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ .......(ii)<br />

⎝ dT ⎠<br />

This definition reduces to the earlier one (as the slope<br />

of a straight line) for a temperature-independent<br />

activation energy. However, the definition in eqn.(ii)<br />

is more general than eqn.(i), because it allows E a to<br />

be obtained from the slope (at the temperature of<br />

interest) of a plot of ln k against 1/T even if the<br />

Arrhenius plot is not a straight line. Non-Arrhenius<br />

behaviour is sometimes a sign that quantum<br />

mechanical tunnelling is playing a significant role in<br />

the reaction.<br />

(b) The interpretation of the parameters :<br />

We shall regard the Arrhenius parameters as purely<br />

empirical quantities that enable us to discuss the<br />

variation of rate constants with temperature;<br />

however, it is useful to have an interpretation in mind<br />

and write eqn.(i) as<br />

E / RT<br />

k = Ae − a<br />

.......(iii)<br />

To interpret E a we consider how the molecular<br />

potential energy changes in the course of a chemical<br />

reaction that begins with a collision between<br />

molecules of A and molecules of B(shown in figure).<br />

1/T<br />

A plot of ln k against 1/T is a straight line when<br />

the reaction follows the behaviour described by<br />

the Arrhenius equation. The slope gives –E a /R<br />

and the intercept at 1/T = 0 gives ln A.<br />

The fact that E a is given by the slope of the plot of<br />

ln k against 1/T means that, the higher the activation<br />

energy, the stronger the temperature dependence of<br />

the rate constant (that is, the steeper the slope). A<br />

high activation energy signifies that the rate constant<br />

depends strongly on temperature. If a reaction has<br />

zero activation energy, its rate is independent of<br />

temperature. In some cases the activation energy is<br />

negative, which indicates that the rate decreases as<br />

the temperature is raised. We shall see that such<br />

Potential energy<br />

Reactants<br />

E a<br />

Products<br />

Progress of reaction<br />

A potential energy profile for an exothermic<br />

reaction. The height of the barrier between<br />

the reactants and products is the activation<br />

energy of the reaction<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 40 DECEMBER 2009


As the reaction event proceeds, A and B come into<br />

contact, distort, and begin to exchange or discard<br />

atoms. The reaction coordinate is the collection of<br />

motions, such as changes in interatomic distances and<br />

bond angles, that are directly involved in the<br />

formation of products from reactants. (The reaction<br />

coordinate is essentially a geometrical concept and<br />

quite distinct from the extent of reaction.) The<br />

potential energy rises to a maximum and the cluster<br />

of atoms that corresponds to the region close to the<br />

maximum is called the activated complex. After the<br />

maximum, the potential energy falls as the atoms<br />

rearrange in the cluster and reaches a value<br />

characteristic of the products. The climax of the<br />

reaction is at the peak of the potential energy, which<br />

corresponds to the activation energy E a . Here two<br />

reactant molecules have come to such a degree of<br />

closeness and distortion that a small further<br />

distortion will send them in the direction of products.<br />

This crucial configuration is called the transition<br />

state of the reaction. Although some molecules<br />

entering the transition state might revert to reactants,<br />

if they pass through this configuration then it is<br />

inevitable that products will emerge from the<br />

encounter.<br />

We also conclude from the preceding discussion that,<br />

for a reaction involving the collision of two<br />

molecules, the activation energy is the minimum<br />

kinetic energy that reactants must have in order<br />

to form products. For example, in a gas-phase<br />

reaction there are numerous collisions each second,<br />

but only a tiny proportion are sufficiently energetic to<br />

lead to reaction. The fraction of collisions with a<br />

kinetic energy in excess of an energy E a is given by<br />

e −<br />

E a / RT<br />

the Boltzmann distribution as . Hence, we<br />

can interpret the exponential factor in eqn(iii) as the<br />

fraction of collision that have enough kinetic energy<br />

to lead to reaction.<br />

The pre-exponential factor is a measure of the rate at<br />

which collisions occur irrespective of their energy.<br />

Hence, the product of A and the exponential factor,<br />

E a / RT<br />

e − , gives the rate of successful collisions.<br />

Kinetic and thermodynamic control of reactions :<br />

In some cases reactants can give rise to a variety of<br />

products, as in nitrations of mono-substituted<br />

benzene, when various proportions of the ortho-,<br />

meta-, and para- substituted products are obtained,<br />

depending on the directing power of the original<br />

substituent. Suppose two products, P 1 and P 2 , are<br />

produced by the following competing reactions :<br />

A + B ⎯→ P 1 Rate of formation of P 1 = k 1 [A][B]<br />

A + B ⎯→ P 2 Rate of formation of P 2 = k 2 [A][B]<br />

The relative proportion in which the two products<br />

have been produced at a given state of the reaction<br />

(before it has reached equilibrium) is given by the<br />

ratio of the two rates, and therefore of the two rate<br />

constants :<br />

[P2]<br />

k 2<br />

=<br />

[P1<br />

] k1<br />

This ratio represents the kinetic control over the<br />

proportions of products, and is a common feature of<br />

the reactions encountered in organic chemistry where<br />

reactants are chosen that facilitate pathways<br />

favouring the formation of a desired product. If a<br />

reaction is allowed to reach equilibrium, then the<br />

proportion of products is determined by<br />

thermodynamic rather than kinetic considerations,<br />

and the ratio of concentration is controlled by<br />

considerations of the standard Gibbs energies of all<br />

the reactants and products.<br />

The kinetic isotope effect<br />

The postulation of a plausible mechanism requires<br />

careful analysis of many experiments designed to<br />

determine the fate of atoms during the formation of<br />

products. Observation of the kinetic isotope effect, a<br />

decrease in the rate of a chemical reaction upon<br />

replacement of one atom in a reactant by a heavier<br />

isotope, facilitates the identification of bond-breaking<br />

events in the rate-determining step. A primary<br />

kinetic isotope effect is observed when the ratedetermining<br />

step requires the scission of a bond<br />

involving the isotope. A secondary isotope effect is<br />

the reduction in reaction rate even though the bond<br />

involving the isotope is not broken to form product.<br />

In both cases, the effect arises from the change in<br />

activation energy that accompanies the replacement<br />

of an atom by a heavier isotope on account of<br />

changes in the zero-point vibrational energies.<br />

First, we consider the origin of the primary kinetic<br />

isotope effect in a reaction in which the ratedetermining<br />

step is the scission of a C–H bond. The<br />

reaction coordinate corresponds to the stretching of<br />

the C–H bond and the potential energy profile is<br />

shown in figure. On deuteration, the dominant<br />

change is the reduction of the zero-point energy of<br />

the bond (because the deuterium atom is heavier).<br />

The whole reaction profile is not lowered, however,<br />

because the relevant vibration in the activated<br />

complex has a very low force constant, so there is<br />

little zero-point energy associated with the reaction<br />

coordinate in either isotopomeric form of the<br />

activated complex.<br />

Potential energy<br />

C–H<br />

C–D<br />

E a (C–H)<br />

E a (C–D)<br />

Reaction coordinate<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 41 DECEMBER 2009


UNDERSTANDING<br />

Inorganic Chemistry<br />

1. A black coloured compound (A) on reaction with dil.<br />

H 2 SO 4 gives a gas (B) which on passing in a solution<br />

of an acid (C) gives a white turbidity (D). Gas (B)<br />

when passed through an acidified solution of a<br />

compound (E), gives ppt.(F) which is soluble in<br />

dilute nitric acid. After boiling this solution an excess<br />

of NH 4 OH is added, a blue coloured compound (G) is<br />

produced. To this solution, on addition of CH 3 COOH<br />

and aqueous K 4 [Fe(CN) 6 ], a chocolate ppt. (H) is<br />

produced. On addition of an aqueous solution of<br />

BaCl 2 to aqueous solution of (E), a white ppt.<br />

insoluble in HNO 3 is obtained. Identify compounds<br />

(A) to (H).<br />

Sol. From the data on compounds (G) and (H), it may be<br />

inferred that the compound (E) contains cupric ions<br />

(Cu 2+ ), i.e., (E) is a salt of copper. Since the addition<br />

of BaCl 2 to (E) gives a white ppt. insoluble in HNO 3 ,<br />

it may be said that the anion in the salt is sulphate ion<br />

(SO 2– 4 ). Hence, (E) is CuSO 4 .<br />

The gas (B) which is obtained by adding dil. H 2 SO 4<br />

to a black coloured compound (A), may be H 2 S since<br />

it can cause precipitation of Cu 2+ ions in acidic<br />

medium. The black coloured compound (A) may be<br />

ferrous sulphide (iron pyrite).<br />

Hence, the given observation may be explained from<br />

the following equations.<br />

Fe S + H 2 SO 4 ⎯→ FeSO 4 + H 2 S<br />

(A) Dil. (B)<br />

H 2 S + 2HNO 3 ⎯→ 2NO 2 + 2H 2 O + S (D)<br />

(C)<br />

White turbidity<br />

CuSO 4 + H 2 S ⎯→ CuS ↓ + H 2 SO 4<br />

(E) (B) (F)<br />

Black ppt.<br />

3CuS + 8HNO 3 ⎯→<br />

Dil. 3Cu(NO 3 ) 2 + 2NO + 3S + 4H 2 O<br />

Cu ++ + 4NH 3 ⎯→ [Cu(NH 3 ) 4 ] 2+<br />

(G) Blue colour<br />

[Cu(NH 3 ) 4 ] 2+ + 4CH 3 COOH ⎯→<br />

Cu 2+ + 4CH 3 COONH 4<br />

Cu 2+ + [Fe(CN) 6 ] 4– ⎯→ Cu 2 [Fe(CN) 6 ]<br />

(H)<br />

Chocolate colour<br />

CuSO 4 (aq) + BaCl 2 (aq) ⎯→ BaSO 4 ↓ + CuCl 2<br />

(E)<br />

White ppt.<br />

Insuluble in HNO 3<br />

Hence,<br />

(A) is FeS, (B) is H 2 S, (C) is HNO 3 , (D) is S,<br />

(E) is CuSO 4 , (F) is CuS, (G) is [Cu(NH 3 ) 4 ]SO 4 and<br />

(H) is Cu 2 [Fe(CN) 6 ]<br />

2. An unknown inorganic compound (X) gives the<br />

following observations :<br />

(i) When added to CuSO 4 solution it liberates iodine<br />

and a white ppt. (Y) is formed. The liberated I 2<br />

reacts with Na 2 S 2 O 3 solution to give NaI and a<br />

colourless compound (Z).<br />

(ii) When CHCl 3 and Cl 2 water is added to aqueous<br />

solution of (X), a violet layer of chloroform is<br />

formed.<br />

(iii)(X) gives a violet colour flame when heated in<br />

Bunsen burner flame.<br />

(iv)When aqueous solution of (X) is added to<br />

aqueous lead nitrate, a yellow ppt. (M) is formed.<br />

(v) Addition of (X) to HgCl 2 gives a red ppt. which<br />

dissolves in excess of (X) to give Nessler's<br />

reagent.<br />

(vi) On heating (X) with dil. HCl and KNO 2 , violet<br />

vapours of a compound (N) are formed which<br />

condenses on the wall of test tube.<br />

What are (X), (Y), (Z), (M) and (N) ? Explain the<br />

reactions.<br />

Sol. Observation (iii) indicates that the compound (X)<br />

contains K + , it is because it gives a violet coloured<br />

flame. On the other hand set (ii) confirmed that (X)<br />

contains I – ions, thus (X) is KI. Now the different<br />

reactions may be formulated as follows.<br />

CHCl<br />

2KI + Cl 2 ⎯⎯⎯<br />

3 → I 2 + 2KCl<br />

Violet layer<br />

(i) When CuSO 4 reacts with KI, I 2 is liberated and a<br />

ppt. of cuprous iodide (Y) is formed.<br />

[CuSO 4 + 2KI ⎯→ K 2 SO 4 + CuI 2 ] × 2<br />

2CuI 2 ⎯→ Cu 2 I 2 + I 2<br />

Unstable<br />

On adding,<br />

2CuSO 4 + 4KI ⎯→ 2K 2 SO 4 + Cu 2 I 2 + I 2<br />

(Y) white ppt.<br />

The librated iodine is titrated against standard hypo<br />

solution when a colourless sodium tetrathionate (Z) is<br />

formed.<br />

2Na 2 S 2 O 3 + I 2 ⎯→ Na 2 S 4 O 6 + 2NaI<br />

(Z) (colourless)<br />

(iv) Pb(NO 3 ) 2 + 2KI ⎯→ PbI 2 + 2KNO 3<br />

(M) yellow ppt<br />

(v) HgCl 2 + 2KI ⎯→ HgI 2 ↓ + 2KCl<br />

Red ppt.<br />

HgI 2 + 2KI ⎯→ K 2 HgI 4<br />

(Soluble)<br />

K 2 HgI 4 + NaOH ⎯→ Nessler's reagent<br />

(vi) HCl + KNO 2 ⎯→ HNO 2 + KCl<br />

HCl + KI ⎯→ KCI + HI<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 42 DECEMBER 2009


2HNO 2 + 2HI ⎯→ I 2 + 2H 2 O + 2NO<br />

(N)<br />

Hence,<br />

(X) is KI,<br />

(Y) is Cu 2 I 2 ,<br />

(Z) is Na 2 S 4 O 6 ,<br />

(M) is PbI 2 and (N) is I 2 .<br />

3. An inorganic halide (A) gives the following<br />

reactions.<br />

(i) The cation of (A) on raction with H 2 S in HCl<br />

medium, gives a black ppt. of (B). (A) neither<br />

gives ppt. with HCl nor blue colour with<br />

K 4 Fe(CN) 6 .<br />

(ii) (B) on heating with dil.HCl gives back<br />

compound(A) and a gas (C) which gives a black<br />

ppt. with lead acetate solution.<br />

(iii) The anion of (A) gives chromyl chloride test.<br />

(iv) (B) dissolves in hot dil. HNO 3 to give a solution,<br />

(D). (D) gives ring test.<br />

(v) When NH 4 OH solution is added to (D), a white<br />

precipitate (E) is formed. (E) dissolves in<br />

minimum amount of dil. HCl to give a solution of<br />

(A). Aqueous solution of (A) on addition of water<br />

gives a whitish turbidity (F).<br />

(vi) Aqueous solution of (A) on warming with<br />

alkaline sodium stannite gives a black precipitate<br />

of a metal (G) and sodium stannate. The metal<br />

(G) dissolves in hydrochloride acid to give<br />

solution of (A).<br />

Identify (A) to (G) and give balanced chemical<br />

equations of reactions.<br />

Sol. Observation of (i) indicates that cation (A) is Bi 3+<br />

because it does not give ppt. with HCl nor blue<br />

colour with K 4 Fe(CN) 6 , hence it is neither Pb 2+ nor<br />

Cu 2+ . Since anion of (A) gives chromyl chloride test,<br />

hence it contains Cl – ions. Thus, (A) is BiCl 3 . Its<br />

different reactions are given below :<br />

(i) 2BiCl 3 + 3H 2 S ⎯→ Bi 2 S 3 + 6HCl<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

(ii) Bi 2 S 3 + 6HCl ⎯→ 3H 2 S + 2 BiCl 3<br />

(B) (C) (A)<br />

(iii) Bi 2 S 3 + 8HNO 3 ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ 2Bi(NO 3 ) 3 + 2NO<br />

(B) (D) + 3S + 4H 2 O<br />

(iv) Bi(N O 3 ) 3 + 3NH 4 OH ⎯→<br />

(D) Bi(OH) 3 ↓ + 3NH 4 NO 3<br />

(E) White ppt.<br />

Bi(OH) 3 + 3HCl ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ BiCl 3 + 3H 2 O<br />

Dil. (A)<br />

BiCl 3 + H 2 O ⎯→ BiOCl + 2HCl<br />

(A)<br />

(F)<br />

Bismuth oxychloride<br />

(White turbidity)<br />

(v) BiCl 3 + 2NaOH +Na 2 [SnO 2 ] ⎯→<br />

(A)<br />

Bi + NaSnO 3 + H 2 O + 3NaCl<br />

(G) Black ppt.<br />

2Bi + 6HCl ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ 2BiCl 3 + 3H 2<br />

(G)<br />

(A)<br />

Hence,<br />

(A) is BiCl 3 ,<br />

(B) is Bi 2 S 3 ,<br />

(C) is H 2 S,<br />

(D) is Bi(NO 3 ) 2 ,<br />

(E) is Bi(OH) 3 , (F) is BiOCl and (G) is Bi<br />

4. (i) An inorganic compound (A) is formed on passing<br />

a gas (B) through a concentrated liquor containing<br />

Na 2 S and Na 2 SO 3 .<br />

(ii) On adding (A) into a dilute solution of AgNO 3 , a<br />

white ppt. appears which quickly changes into<br />

black coloured compound (C).<br />

(iii) On adding two or three drops of FeCl 3 into<br />

excess of solution of (A), a violet coloured<br />

compound (D) is formed. This colour disappears<br />

quickly.<br />

(iv) On adding a solution of (A) into the solution of<br />

CuCl 2 , a white ppt. is first formed which dissolves<br />

on adding excess of (A) forming a compound (E).<br />

Identify (A) to (E) and give chemical equations for<br />

the reactions at steps (i) to (iv)<br />

Sol. (i) The compound (A) appears to be Na 2 S 2 O 3 from its<br />

method of preparation given in the problem.<br />

Na 2 S + Na 2 SO 3 + I 2 ⎯→ 2NaI + Na 2 S 2 O 3<br />

(B)<br />

(A)<br />

or Na 2 SO 3 + 3Na 2 S + 3SO 2 ⎯→ 3Na 2 S 2 O 3<br />

(B)<br />

(A)<br />

(ii) White ppt. of Ag 2 S 2 O 3 is formed which is<br />

hydrolysed to black Ag 2 S<br />

Na 2 S 2 O 3 + 2AgNO 3 ⎯→ 2NaNO 3 + Ag 2 S 2 O 3 ↓<br />

White ppt<br />

Ag 2 S 2 O 3 + H 2 O ⎯→ Ag 2 S + H 2 SO 4<br />

(C)<br />

(iii) A violet ferric salt is formed.<br />

3Na 2 S 2 O 3 + 2FeCl 3 ⎯→ Fe 2 (S 2 O 3 ) 3 + 6NaCl<br />

(D)(violet)<br />

(iv) 2CuCl 2 + 2Na 2 S 2 O 3 → 2CuCl + Na 2 S 4 O 6 + 2NaCl<br />

White ppt.<br />

2CuCl + Na 2 S 2 O 3 ⎯→ Cu 2 S 2 O 3 + 2NaCl<br />

3Cu 2 S 2 O 3 + 2Na 2 S 2 O 3 ⎯→ Na 4 [Cu 6 (S 2 O 3 ) 5 ]<br />

(E)<br />

or 6CuCl + 5Na 2 S 2 O 3 ⎯→ Na 4 [Cu 6 (S 2 O 3 ) 5 ] + 6NaCl<br />

(E)<br />

Hence,<br />

(A) is Na 2 S 2 O 3 ,<br />

(B) is I 2 or SO 2 ,<br />

(C) is Ag 2 S,<br />

(D) is Fe 2 (S 2 O 3 ) 3 and<br />

(E) is Na 4 [Cu 6 (S 2 O 3 ) 5 ]<br />

5. A colourless solid (A) on heating gives a white solid<br />

(B) and a colourless gas (C). (B) gives off reddishbrown<br />

fumes on treating with H 2 SO 4 . On treating<br />

with NH 4 Cl, (B) gives a colourless gas (D) and a<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 43 DECEMBER 2009


esidue (E). The compound (A) on heating with<br />

(NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 gives a colourless gas (F) and white<br />

residue (G). Both (E) and (G) impart bright yellow<br />

colour to Bunsen flame. The gas (C) forms white<br />

powder with strongly heated Mg metal which on<br />

hydrolysis produces Mg(OH) 2 . The gas (D) on<br />

heating with Ca gives a compound which on<br />

hydrolysis produces NH 3 . Identify compounds (A) to<br />

(G) giving chemical equations involved.<br />

Sol. The given information is as follows :<br />

(i) A ⎯ Heat ⎯⎯ → B + C<br />

Colourless Solid Colourless<br />

Solid<br />

gas<br />

(ii) B + H 2 SO 4 ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ Reddish brown gas<br />

(iii) B + NH 4 Cl ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ D + E<br />

Colourless gas<br />

(iv) A + (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ F + G<br />

olourless gas White<br />

Residue<br />

(v) E and G imparts yellow colour to the flame.<br />

(vi) C + Mg ⎯ Heat ⎯⎯ →White powder<br />

⎯ H 2<br />

⎯⎯ O →Mg(OH) 2<br />

(vii) D + Ca ⎯ Heat ⎯⎯ →Compound ⎯ H 2<br />

⎯⎯ O →NH 3<br />

Information of (v) indicates that (E) and (G) and also<br />

(A) are the salts of sodium because Na + ions give<br />

yellow coloured flame. Observations of (ii) indicate<br />

that the anion associated with Na + in (A) may be<br />

NO – 3 . Thus, the compound (A) is NaNO 3 .<br />

The reactions involved are as follows :<br />

(i) 2NaNO 3 ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ 2NaNO 2 + O 2 ↑<br />

(A) (B) (C)<br />

(ii) 2NaNO 2 + H 2 SO 4 ⎯→ Na 2 SO 4 + 2HNO 2<br />

(B) Dil.<br />

3HNO 2 ⎯→ HNO 3 + H 2 O + 2NO↑<br />

2NO + O 2 ⎯→ 2NO 2 ↑<br />

Reddish brown<br />

Fumes<br />

(iii) NaNO 2 + NH 4 Cl ⎯→ NaCl + N 2 ↑ + 2H 2 O<br />

(B) (E) (D)<br />

(iv) 2NaNO 3 + (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ Na 2 SO 4 + 2NH 3<br />

(A) (G) (F)<br />

2HNO 3<br />

(v) O 2 + 2Mg ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ 2MgO ⎯ H 2<br />

⎯⎯ O →Mg(OH) 2<br />

(C)<br />

(vi) N 2 + 3Ca ⎯⎯→<br />

∆ Ca 3 N 2<br />

(D)<br />

Ca 3 N 2 + 6H 2 O ⎯→ 3Ca(OH) 2 + 2NH 3 ↑<br />

Hence,<br />

(A) is NaNO 3 ,<br />

(B) is NaNO 2 ,<br />

(C) is O 2 ,<br />

(D) is N 2 ,<br />

(E) is NaCl,<br />

(F) is NH 3 and (G) is Na 2 SO 4 .<br />

TRUE OR FALSE<br />

1. The magnitude of charge on one gram of<br />

electrons is 1.60 × 10 –19 coulomb.<br />

2. Chromyl chloride test of Cl – radical is not given<br />

by HgCl 2 .<br />

3. The energy levels in a hydrogen atom can be<br />

compared with the steps of a ladder placed at<br />

equal distance.<br />

4. In S N 1 mechanism, the leaving group in the<br />

molecule, leaves the molecule, well before<br />

joining of an attacking group.<br />

5. Metamerism is special type of isomerism where<br />

isomers exist simultaneously in dynamic<br />

equilibrium.<br />

6. Addition of HCN with formaldehyde is an<br />

example of electrophilic addition reaction.<br />

7. Ligroin is essentially petroleum ether containing<br />

aliphatic hydrocarbons and is generally used in<br />

dry cleaning clothes.<br />

Sol.<br />

1. [False] Thomson through his experiment<br />

determined the charge to mass ratio of an<br />

electron and the value of e/m is equal to 1.76 ×<br />

10 8 coulomb/gm. Hence one gm of electrons<br />

have charge 1.76 × 10 8 C.<br />

2. [True]<br />

3. [False]<br />

4. [True] S N 1 reaction mechanism takes place in<br />

two steps as :<br />

R—X<br />

R + + OH –<br />

⎯ Slow ⎯→ ⎯ R + + X –<br />

⎯ Fast ⎯→<br />

ROH<br />

5. [False] In metamerism isomers differ in structure<br />

due to difference in distribution of carbon atoms<br />

about the functional group.<br />

For example :<br />

CH 3 CH 2 –O–CH 2 CH 3 and CH 3 –OCH 2 CH 2 CH 3<br />

Conditions mentioned in the statement are<br />

associated with phenomenon of trautomerism.<br />

6. [False]<br />

H<br />

H – C = O + H + CN –<br />

7. [True]<br />

H<br />

H – C = OH<br />

CN<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 44 DECEMBER 2009


`tà{xÅtà|vtÄ V{tÄÄxÇzxá<br />

Set<br />

8<br />

This section is designed to give <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety<br />

of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and<br />

we hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and<br />

enhancing the preparation level of <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants.<br />

By : Shailendra Maheshwari<br />

Solutions will be published in next issue<br />

Joint Director Academics, <strong>Career</strong> <strong>Point</strong>, Kota<br />

1. Show that the six planes through the middle point of<br />

each edge of a tetrahedron perpendicular to the<br />

opposite edge meet in a point.<br />

2. Prove that if the graph of the function<br />

y = f (x), defined throughout the number scale, is<br />

symmetrical about two lines x = a and x = b, (a < b),<br />

then this function is a periodic one.<br />

3. Show that an equilateral triangle is a triangle of<br />

maximum area for a given perimeter and a triangle of<br />

minimum perimeter for a given area.<br />

4. Let az 2 + bz + c be a polynomial with complex<br />

coefficients such that a and b are non zero. Prove<br />

that the zeros of this polynomial lie in the region<br />

| z | ≤ a<br />

b + b<br />

c<br />

5. An isosceles triangle with its base parallel to the<br />

x y<br />

major axis of the ellipse +<br />

2 2 = 1 is<br />

a b<br />

circumscribed with all the three sides touching the<br />

ellipse. Find the least possible area of the triangle.<br />

6. If one of the straight lines given by the equation ax 2 +<br />

2hxy + by 2 = 0 coincides with one of those given by<br />

a′x 2 + 2h′xy + b′y 2 = 0 and the other lines represented<br />

ha´b´ h´ab´<br />

by them be perpendicular, show that =<br />

b´ −a´<br />

b − a<br />

7. Prove that<br />

⎛n<br />

⎞ ⎛m ⎞ ⎛n<br />

⎜<br />

⎟<br />

⎝0<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ +<br />

⎠ ⎝n<br />

⎟ ⎞ ⎛ m + 1⎞<br />

⎛n<br />

⎜<br />

⎠ ⎝1<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ +<br />

⎠ ⎝ n ⎟ ⎞ ⎛ m + 2⎞<br />

⎜<br />

⎠ ⎝ 2<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ + ....... to<br />

⎠ ⎝ n ⎠<br />

(n + 1) terms<br />

⎛n<br />

= ⎟ ⎞ ⎛m ⎞ ⎛n<br />

⎜<br />

⎝0<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ +<br />

⎠ ⎝ 0 ⎟ ⎞ ⎛m⎞<br />

⎛n<br />

⎜<br />

⎠ ⎝1<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ 2 +<br />

⎠ ⎝ 1 ⎟ ⎞ ⎛m⎞<br />

⎜<br />

⎠ ⎝ 2<br />

⎜<br />

⎟ 2 2 + ..... to (n +<br />

⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

1) terms<br />

1<br />

8. If n ≥ 2 and I n =<br />

∫<br />

( 1−<br />

x<br />

2 ) n cos mx dx, then show that<br />

−1<br />

m 2 I n = 2n(2n – 1) I n–1 – 4n(n – 1) I n–2 .<br />

2<br />

2<br />

9. Find the sum to infinite terms of the series<br />

3 5 7 9 11 + + + + + ........ ∞<br />

4 36 144 400 900<br />

10. ABC is a triangle inscribed in a circle. Two of its<br />

sides are parallel to two given straight lines. Show<br />

that the locus of foot of the perpendicular from the<br />

centre of the circle on to the third side is also a circle,<br />

concentric to the given circle.<br />

Dimensional Formulae of Some<br />

Physical Quantities<br />

Physical Quantity<br />

Dime nsional<br />

Formulae<br />

Work (W) [ML 2 T –2 ]<br />

Stress [ML –1 T –2 ]<br />

Torque (τ) [ML 2 T –2 ]<br />

Moment of Inertia (I) [ML 2 ]<br />

Coefficient of viscosity (η) [ML –1 T –1 ]<br />

Gravitational constant (G) [M –1 L 3 T –2 ]<br />

Specific heat (S) [L 2 T –2 θ –1 ]<br />

Coeficient of thermal conductivity (K) [MLT –3 θ –1 ]<br />

Universal gas constant (R) [ML 2 T –2 θ –1 ]<br />

Potential (V) [ML 2 T –3 A –1 ]<br />

Intensity of electric field (E) [MLT –3 A –1 ]<br />

Permittivity of free space (ε 0 ) [M –1 L –3 T 4 A 2 ]<br />

Specific resistance (ρ) [ML 3 T –3 A 2 ]<br />

Magnetic Induction (B) [MT –2 A –1 ]<br />

Planck's constant (h) [ML 2 T –1 ]<br />

Boltzmann's constant (k) [ML 2 T –2 θ –1 ]<br />

Entropy (S) [ML 2 T –2 θ –1 ]<br />

Decay constant (λ) [T –1 ]<br />

Bohr magnetic (µ B ) [L 2 A]<br />

Thermmionic current density (J) [AL –2 ]<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 45 DECEMBER 2009


MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES<br />

SOLUTION FOR NOVEMBER ISSUE (SET # 7)<br />

1. Let the line be y = 2x + c<br />

⎛ 9 − c 9 + 2c ⎞<br />

<strong>Point</strong> A ⎜ , ⎟<br />

⎝ 6 3 ⎠<br />

2.<br />

⎛ 2c − 3 + c − 6 ⎞<br />

<strong>Point</strong> B ⎜ , ⎟<br />

⎝ − 3 − 3 ⎠<br />

⎛ c + 6 5c + 12 ⎞<br />

<strong>Point</strong> C ⎜ , ⎟<br />

⎝ 3 3 ⎠<br />

1 ⎡ 2c − 3 c + 6 ⎤<br />

mid point of B & C is . 2<br />

⎢ + ⎥ ,<br />

⎣ − 3 3 ⎦<br />

1 ⎡ − c + 6 5c + 12⎤<br />

⎡ 9 − c 2c + 9⎤<br />

⎢ +<br />

2<br />

⎥ =<br />

⎣ + 3 3<br />

⎢ , ⎥<br />

⎦ ⎣ 6 3 ⎦<br />

which is point A, so AB and AC are equal.<br />

a<br />

B<br />

A<br />

D<br />

b<br />

C<br />

1 AB 1 AC<br />

a + b = . + . AB AB AC AC<br />

=<br />

1<br />

2<br />

AB<br />

AB +<br />

1<br />

AC<br />

2<br />

AC<br />

1<br />

1<br />

= (AD + DB)<br />

+ (AD + DC)<br />

2<br />

2<br />

AB<br />

AC<br />

⎛ 1 1 ⎞ DB DC<br />

= ⎜ + ⎟ AD +<br />

2 2<br />

+<br />

⎝ AB AC ⎠ BD.DC CD. CB<br />

⎛ 1 1 ⎞ ⎛ DB DC ⎞<br />

= ⎜ + ⎟ AD + ⎜ ⎟<br />

2 2<br />

⎝ AB AC ⎠ + ⎝ BD CD ⎠<br />

⎛ 1 1 ⎞<br />

= AD . ⎜ + ⎟<br />

⎝ BD.DC CD.CB ⎠<br />

AD ⎛<br />

= . ⎜ CD ⎝<br />

1<br />

BD<br />

+ CD<br />

1<br />

⎟⎠<br />

⎞<br />

1<br />

BC<br />

AD DC + BD<br />

= .<br />

BC BD.CD<br />

=<br />

AD AD =<br />

BD.CD<br />

2<br />

AD<br />

so it is vector along<br />

| a + b<br />

1<br />

| = AD<br />

AD 1 = . AD AD<br />

1<br />

A B with magnitude . AD<br />

3. The line PQ always passes through (α, β) so it is<br />

y –β = m(x – α)<br />

Let the circle be x 2 + y 2 – 2hx – 2ky = 0<br />

Joint equation of OP and OQ.<br />

x 2 + y 2 (y − mx)<br />

– 2 (hx + ky) = 0<br />

β − mα<br />

O<br />

Q<br />

P<br />

(h,k)<br />

⎛ 2k ⎞<br />

⎜1−<br />

⎟ y 2 ⎛ h − mk ⎞ ⎛ 2hn ⎞<br />

– 2 ⎜ ⎟ xy + ⎜1+<br />

⎟ x 2 = 0<br />

⎝ β − mα<br />

⎠ ⎝ β − mα<br />

⎠ ⎝ β − mα<br />

⎠<br />

It must represent y 2 – x 2 = 0<br />

h − mk<br />

so = 0 ⇒ m = h/k ...(1)<br />

β − mα<br />

2k 2hm<br />

and 1 – = –1 –<br />

β − mα<br />

β − mα<br />

⇒ β – mα – 2k = –β + mα – 2hm<br />

⇒ –β + mα + k – hm = 0<br />

⇒ –β + k + h/k(α – h) = 0 (using (1) in it)<br />

⇒ k 2 – βy + αh – h 2 = 0 so required locus is<br />

x 2 – y 2 – αx + βy = 0<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 46 DECEMBER 2009


⎛ π π ⎞<br />

4. As |f(x)| ≤ |tan x| for ∀ x ∈ ⎜−<br />

, ⎟<br />

⎝ 2 2 ⎠<br />

(–1,log 2 3 )<br />

so f(0) = 0<br />

so |f(x) – f(0)| ≤ |tan x|<br />

divides both sides by |x|<br />

f (x) − f (0) tan x<br />

⇒<br />

≤<br />

x x<br />

(–1,0)<br />

(0,–1)<br />

(1,0)<br />

(3/2,–1)<br />

⇒ lim f (x) − f (0)<br />

≤<br />

x→0<br />

x<br />

⇒ |f´(0)| ≤ 1<br />

⇒<br />

lim x→0<br />

tan x<br />

x<br />

1 1 1<br />

a 1 + a 2 + a 3 + ..... + a n ≤ 1<br />

2 3 n<br />

n<br />

a<br />

⇒ ∑<br />

i=<br />

1<br />

i<br />

i<br />

≤ 1<br />

5. Let the number is xyz, here x < y and z < y.<br />

Let y = n, then x can be filled in (n – 1) ways.<br />

(i.e. from 1 to (n – 1)) and z can be filled in n ways<br />

(i.e. from 0 to (n – 1))<br />

here 2 ≤ n ≤ 9<br />

so total no. of 3 digit numbers with largest middle<br />

digit<br />

n<br />

9<br />

= ∑ n (n −1)<br />

=<br />

=<br />

∑ n –<br />

n = 2<br />

∑ n<br />

n = 2<br />

=<br />

2<br />

9.10.19<br />

6<br />

–<br />

9<br />

9.10<br />

2<br />

= 285 – 45 = 240<br />

required probability =<br />

2<br />

9<br />

240<br />

9×<br />

10×<br />

10<br />

= 30<br />

8<br />

= 15<br />

4<br />

6. The region bounded by the curve y = log 2 (2 – x) and<br />

the inequality (x – |x|) 2 + (y – |y|) 2 ≤ 4 is required area<br />

is<br />

7.<br />

1<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

log 2 (2 − x) dx +<br />

∫<br />

−<br />

y 1<br />

( 2 2 ) dy + π 4<br />

−1<br />

0<br />

−1<br />

2<br />

= log 2 3 − + 2log2<br />

3 + 2 –<br />

l n2<br />

e 2 e<br />

= – log 2<br />

27<br />

B<br />

+ 2 + 4<br />

π sq units<br />

F<br />

A<br />

D<br />

E<br />

M<br />

∠BMC = 2∠BAC = 2∠BMD<br />

BD<br />

so tan A = = MD<br />

so<br />

a<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

r<br />

2<br />

= tan 2 A<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 π<br />

+<br />

2ln2<br />

4<br />

C<br />

BC a = =<br />

2BC<br />

MD 4r<br />

1 4r<br />

1<br />

a b c<br />

so + +<br />

2 2 2<br />

r1<br />

r2<br />

r3<br />

= 16 (tan 2 A + tan 2 B + tan 2 C) ...(1)<br />

Now as tan A + tan B + tan C ≥<br />

3 (tan A . tan B . tan C) 1/3<br />

and for a triangle tan A + tan B + tan C<br />

= tan A . tan B . tan C<br />

so (tan A . tan B . tan C) 2/3 ≥ 3<br />

⇒ tan A . tan B . tan C ≥ 3 3<br />

⇒ tan 2 A + tan 2 B + tan 2 C<br />

≥ 3(tan A. tan B tan C) 2/3 ≥ 3.3<br />

so from (1),<br />

a<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

r<br />

+<br />

b<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

r<br />

+<br />

c<br />

2<br />

2<br />

3<br />

r<br />

≥ 144.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 47 DECEMBER 2009


8. Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 are centroids of equilateral triangles ACX,<br />

ABY and BCZ respectively.<br />

Z 1 – Z A = (Z C – Z A )<br />

y<br />

Z 1 – Z A = (Z C – Z A )<br />

similarly,<br />

Z 2 – Z A = (Z B – Z A )<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Z A<br />

1<br />

C<br />

− Z<br />

− Z<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A Z 1<br />

Z 2<br />

e iπ/6 x<br />

B C<br />

Z B Z C<br />

Z 3<br />

1 ⎛<br />

⎜<br />

3<br />

⎝<br />

1 ⎛<br />

⎜<br />

3<br />

⎝<br />

So, Z 1 – Z 2 = 2<br />

1 (ZC – Z B ) +<br />

z<br />

3 i ⎞<br />

+ ⎟<br />

2 2 ⎠<br />

3 i ⎞<br />

− ⎟<br />

2 2 ⎠<br />

similarly Z 2 – Z 3 = 2<br />

1 (ZA – Z C )<br />

...(1)<br />

...(2)<br />

i<br />

(Z C + Z B – 2Z A )<br />

2 3<br />

...(3)<br />

i<br />

+ (Z A + Z C – 2Z B ) ..(4)<br />

2 3<br />

To prove ∆xyz as equilateral triangle, we prove that<br />

(Z 3 – Z 2 )e iπ/3 = Z 1 – Z 2<br />

So, (Z 3 – Z 2 )e iπ/3 = ( 2<br />

1 (ZC – Z A )<br />

i<br />

⎛<br />

– (Z A + Z C – 2Z B )) ⎜<br />

1<br />

2 3<br />

⎝ 2<br />

= 2<br />

1 (ZC – Z B ) +<br />

= Z 1 – Z 2<br />

a<br />

1−<br />

r cosu<br />

9. T r = 2<br />

∫ 1−<br />

2r cosu + r<br />

0<br />

a<br />

3<br />

+ i<br />

2<br />

i<br />

(Z C + Z B – 2Z A )<br />

2 3<br />

2<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

du. ...(1)<br />

1−<br />

2r cosu + r − r + 1<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

du<br />

2<br />

1−<br />

2r cosu + r<br />

0<br />

a<br />

⎛<br />

2<br />

1<br />

=<br />

∫ ⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

− r<br />

1+<br />

du<br />

2<br />

⎝ 1−<br />

2r cosu + r ⎠<br />

0<br />

2<br />

2<br />

= a + (1 – r 2 )<br />

a<br />

∫<br />

0<br />

(1 + r<br />

2<br />

)(1 + tan<br />

a<br />

2<br />

sec<br />

2<br />

u / 2<br />

u / 2) − 2r(1 − tan<br />

= a + (1 – r 2 sec u / 2<br />

)<br />

∫ 2 2<br />

(1 + r) tan u / 2 + (1 − r)<br />

= a +<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

2<br />

(1 + r)<br />

Let tan u/2 = t<br />

so, T r = a +<br />

Now<br />

and<br />

= a +<br />

2<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

0<br />

2<br />

(1 + r)<br />

2(1 − r<br />

2<br />

(1 + r)<br />

2<br />

)<br />

a<br />

∫<br />

0<br />

2<br />

lim T<br />

+ r = a –<br />

r→1<br />

lim T<br />

+ r = a +<br />

r→1<br />

tan<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

sec u / 2 du<br />

tana/ 2<br />

∫<br />

0<br />

1+<br />

r<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

(1 − r)<br />

u / 2 +<br />

(1 + r)<br />

t<br />

2<br />

⎡<br />

⎢tan<br />

⎣<br />

2dt<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

+<br />

1+<br />

r<br />

−1<br />

2(1 + r)(r −1)<br />

(1 + r)(r −1)<br />

2(1 − r)(r + 1)<br />

(1 + r)(r −1)<br />

and (from (1)) T 1 =<br />

∫ a 0<br />

du = a<br />

Hence<br />

difference π.<br />

lim T<br />

+ r , T 1 ,<br />

r→1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

⎛ 1+<br />

r ⎞⎤<br />

⎜t<br />

⎥<br />

1 r<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ − ⎠<br />

⎦<br />

2<br />

u / 2)<br />

2<br />

tana/ 2<br />

0<br />

π = a – π<br />

2<br />

π = a + π<br />

2<br />

lim T<br />

− r form an A.P. with common<br />

r→1<br />

10. Let α, β, γ be the three real roots of the equation<br />

without loss of generality, it can be assumed that<br />

α ≤ β ≤ γ.<br />

so<br />

x 2 + ax 2 + bx + c = (x – γ) (x 2 + (a + γ) x + (γ 2 + aγ + b))<br />

where – γ (γ 2 + aγ + b) = c, as γ is the root of given<br />

equation, so x 2 + (a + γ) x + (γ 2 + aγ + b) = 0 must<br />

have two roots i.e. α and β. So its discriminant is non<br />

negative, thus<br />

(γ + a) 2 – 4(γ 2 + aγ + b) ≥ 0<br />

3γ 2 + 2aγ – a 2 + 4b ≤ 0<br />

2 −<br />

− a + 2 a 3b<br />

so γ ≤<br />

3<br />

so greatest root is also less than or equal to<br />

− a + 2 a<br />

2 − 3b<br />

.<br />

3<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 48 DECEMBER 2009


MATHS<br />

Students' Forum<br />

Expert’s Solution for Question asked by <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Aspirants<br />

1. Suppose f(x) = x 3 + ax 2 + bx + c, where a, b, c are<br />

chosen respectively by throwing a die three times.<br />

Find the probability that f(x) is an increasing<br />

function.<br />

Sol. f´(x) = 3x 2 + 2ax + b<br />

y = f(x) is strictly increasing<br />

⇒ f´(x) > 0 ∀ x<br />

⇒ (2a) 2 – 4.3.b < 0<br />

This is true for exactly 15 ordered pairs (a, b); 1 ≤ a,<br />

15 5<br />

b ≤ 6, so probability = = 36 12<br />

3. Let g be a real valued function satisfying g(x) + g(x +<br />

4) = g(x + 2) + g(x + 6), then prove that<br />

∫ x +8<br />

x<br />

is a constant function.<br />

g(t)<br />

dt<br />

Sol. given that g(x) + g(x + 4) = g(x + 2) + g(x + 6) ...(1)<br />

putting x = x + 2 in (1) ........<br />

g(x + 2) + g(x + 6) = g(x + 4) + g(x + 8) ...(2)<br />

from (1) & (2)<br />

g(x) = g(x + B)<br />

Now, f(x) =<br />

∫ x +8<br />

x<br />

g(t)<br />

dt<br />

2. If (a, b, c) is a point on the plane 3x + 2y + z = 7,<br />

then find the least value of a 2 + b 2 + c 2 , using vector<br />

methods.<br />

Sol. Let → A = a î + b ĵ + c kˆ<br />

⇒ → B = 3î + 2 ĵ + kˆ<br />

f´(x) = g(x + 8) – g(x) = 0<br />

⇒ g is constant function<br />

4. If exactly three distinct chords from (h, 0) point to the<br />

circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 are bisected by the parabola<br />

y 2 = 4ax, a > 0, then find the range of 'h' parameter.<br />

Sol. Let M(at 2 , 2at) is mid-point of chord AB, then chord<br />

⇒<br />

→ →<br />

(A.B)<br />

2<br />

≤ | → A | 2 | → B| 2<br />

AB = T = S 1<br />

3a + 2b + c ≤<br />

(7) 2 ≤ (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) (14)<br />

2<br />

2<br />

a + b + c 14<br />

2<br />

B<br />

M<br />

A<br />

{Q 3a + 2b + c = 7, point lies on the plane}<br />

a 2 + b 2 + c 2 49 7<br />

≥ = 14 2<br />

AB : x.at 2 + y.2at = a 2 t 4 + 4a 2 t 2<br />

since AB chord passes through (h, 0)<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 49 DECEMBER 2009


so, h.at 2 = a 2 t 4 + 4a 2 t 2<br />

Sol. Let P be (x 1 , y 1 ),<br />

at 2 [at 2 + (4a – h)] = 0<br />

If a > 0 ⇒ 4a – h < 0<br />

Q<br />

A<br />

P<br />

⇒ h > 4a<br />

...(i)<br />

Now point (at 2 ,2at) must lie inside the circle, on<br />

solving<br />

a 2 t 4 + 4a 2 t 2 – a 2 < 0<br />

we get, h < a ( 5 + 2) ...(ii)<br />

from (i) & (ii)<br />

4a < h < a ( 5 + 2)<br />

5. Find the sum of the terms of G.P. a + ar + ar 2 + ..... + ∞<br />

where a is the value of x for which the function<br />

7 + 2x log e 25 – 5 x – 1 – 5 2– x has the greatest value and<br />

x t dt<br />

r is the Lt<br />

→0∫ 0<br />

2<br />

x tan( π + x<br />

a<br />

Sol. S =<br />

1− r<br />

,<br />

x )<br />

2<br />

To get the greatest value f´(x) = 2log e 25 – 5 x – 1 log 5<br />

+ 5 2– x log 5<br />

f´(x) = 4 log e 5 – 5 x– 1 log e 5 + 5.5 1 – x log e 5<br />

⇒ f´(x) = 0 put 5 x – 1 t(> 0)<br />

t 2 – 4t – 5 = 0 ⇒ t = 5 ⇒ 5 x –1 = 5 ⇒ x = 2<br />

to evaluate r :<br />

x t dt 1<br />

r = Lt<br />

→0∫ x 0<br />

2<br />

x tan( π + x )<br />

= π<br />

2<br />

1 2π<br />

since a = 2, r = ⇒ sum of G.P. = π π −1<br />

6. The tangent and normal at a point P on the ellipse<br />

2<br />

x y<br />

= 1 meets the y-axis at A and B<br />

2<br />

a b<br />

respectively. Find the angle subtended by AB at the<br />

points of intersection of the circle (through A,S,B)<br />

and the ellipse. S being one of the foci.<br />

+ 2<br />

2<br />

N<br />

B<br />

<strong>Point</strong>s of intersection of tangent and normal at P<br />

⎛<br />

2<br />

b ⎞ ⎛<br />

2<br />

a y ⎞<br />

points with y-axis and A ⎜ ⎟<br />

0 ,<br />

, B⎜<br />

1 ⎟<br />

⎝ y<br />

0 , y1<br />

−<br />

2<br />

,<br />

1 ⎠ ⎝ b ⎠<br />

S : (ae, 0)<br />

slope (SA). slope (SB) = –1<br />

⇒ ∠ASB = 90º (PA and PB are tangent and normal)<br />

P must lie on the circle with AB as diameter.<br />

Hence the point of intersection of the ellipse and the<br />

circle is P. Due to symmetry the angles made by AB<br />

at P,Q,M, N are all 90º.<br />

M<br />

Do you know<br />

• 100 years ago: The first virus was found in both<br />

plants and animals.<br />

• 90 years ago: The Grand Canyon became a<br />

national monument & Cellophane is invented.<br />

• 80 years ago: The food mixer and the domestic<br />

refrigerator were invented.<br />

• 70 years ago: The teletype and PVC (polyvinylchloride)<br />

were invented.<br />

• 60 years ago: Otto Hahn discovered nuclear<br />

fission by splitting uranium, Teflon was invented.<br />

• 50 years ago: Velcro was invented.<br />

• 40 years ago: An all-female population of lizards<br />

was discovered in Armenia.<br />

• 30 years ago: The computer mouse was<br />

invented.<br />

• 20 years ago: First test-tube baby born in<br />

England, Pluto’s moon, Charon, discovered.<br />

• 10 years ago: First patent for a geneticallyengineered<br />

mouse was issued to Harvard<br />

Medical School.<br />

S<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 50 DECEMBER 2009


MATH<br />

MONOTONICITY,<br />

MAXIMA & MINIMA<br />

Mathematics Fundamentals<br />

Monotonic Functions :<br />

A function f(x) defined in a domain D is said to be<br />

(i) Monotonic increasing :<br />

⎧x1<br />

< x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

≤ f (x 2 )<br />

⇔ ⎨<br />

∀ x 1 , x 2 ∈ D<br />

⎩x1<br />

> x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

≥ f (x 2)<br />

y<br />

x<br />

x<br />

O<br />

O<br />

⎧x1<br />

< x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

> / f (x 2)<br />

i.e., ⇔ ⎨<br />

∀ x 1 , x 2 ∈ D<br />

⎩x1<br />

> x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

< / f (x 2)<br />

(ii) Monotonic decreasing :<br />

⎧x1<br />

< x 2 ⇒ f (x1<br />

) ≥ f(x 2 )<br />

⇔ ⎨<br />

∀ x 1 , x 2 ∈ D<br />

⎩x1<br />

> x 2 ⇒ f (x 1)<br />

≤ f(x 2 )<br />

y<br />

x<br />

x<br />

O<br />

O<br />

⎧x1<br />

< x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

< / f (x 2)<br />

i.e., ⇔ ⎨<br />

∀ x 1 , x 2 ∈ D<br />

⎩x1<br />

> x 2 ⇒ f (x1)<br />

/ > f(x 2)<br />

A function is said to be monotonic function in a<br />

domain if it is either monotonic increasing or<br />

monotonic decreasing in that domain.<br />

Note : If x 1 < x 2 ⇒ f(x 1 ) < f(x 2 ) ∀ x 1 , x 2 ∈ D, then<br />

f(x) is called strictly increasing in domain D and<br />

similarly decreasing in D.<br />

Method of testing monotonicity :<br />

(i) At a point : A function f(x) is said to be<br />

monotonic increasing (decreasing) at a point x = a of<br />

its domain if it is monotonic increasing (decreasing)<br />

in the interval (a – h, a + h) where h is a small<br />

positive number. Hence we may observer that if f(x)<br />

is monotonic increasing at x = a then at this point<br />

tangent to its graph will make an acute angle with x-<br />

axis where as if the function is monotonic decreasing<br />

there then tangent will make an obtuse angle with x-<br />

axis. Consequently f´(a) will be positive or negative<br />

y<br />

y<br />

according as f(x) is monotonic increasing or<br />

decreasing at x = a.<br />

So at x = a, function f(x) is<br />

monotonic increasing ⇔ f´(a) > 0<br />

monotonic decreasing ⇔ f´(a) < 0<br />

(ii) In an interval : In [a, b], f(x) is<br />

monotonic increasing ⇔ f´(x) ≥ 0⎫<br />

⎪<br />

monotonic decreasing ⇔ f´(x) ≤ 0⎬<br />

∀ x ∈ (a, b)<br />

constant ⇔ f´(x) = 0⎪<br />

⎭<br />

Note :<br />

(i) In above results f´(x) should not be zero for all<br />

values of x, otherwise f(x) will be a constant<br />

function.<br />

(ii) If in [a, b], f´(x) < 0 at least for one value of x and<br />

f´(x) > 0 for at least one value of x, then f(x) will<br />

not be monotonic in [a, b].<br />

Examples of monotonic function :<br />

If a functions is monotonic increasing (decreasing ) at<br />

every point of its domain, then it is said to be<br />

monotonic increasing (decreasing) function.<br />

In the following table we have example of some<br />

monotonic/not monotonic functions<br />

Monotonic<br />

increasing<br />

Monotonic<br />

decreasing<br />

Not<br />

monotonic<br />

x 3 1/x, x > 0 x 2<br />

x|x| 1 – 2x |x|<br />

e x e –x e x + e –x<br />

log x log 2 x sin x<br />

sin h x cosec h x, x > 0 cos h x<br />

[x] cot hx, x > 0 sec h x<br />

Properties of monotonic functions :<br />

If f(x) is strictly increasing in some interval, then in<br />

that interval, f –1 exists and that is also strictly<br />

increasing function.<br />

If f(x) is continuous in [a, b] and differentiable in<br />

(a, b), then<br />

f´(c) ≥ 0 ∀ c ∈ (a, b) ⇒ f(x) is monotonic increasing<br />

in [a, b]<br />

f´(c) ≥ 0 ∀ c ∈ (a, b) ⇒ f(x) is monotonic decreasing<br />

in [a, b]<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 51 DECEMBER 2009


If both f(x) and g(x) are increasing (or decreasing) in<br />

[a, b] and gof is defined in [a, b], then gof is<br />

increasing.<br />

If f(x) and g(x) are two monotonic functions in [a, b]<br />

such that one is increasing and other is decreasing<br />

then gof, it is defined, is decreasing function.<br />

Maximum and Minimum <strong>Point</strong>s :<br />

The value of a function f(x) is said to be maximum at<br />

x = a if there exists a small positive number δ such<br />

that f(a) > f(x)<br />

y<br />

( ) ( ) ( ) x<br />

O a b c<br />

Also then the point x = a is called a maximum point<br />

for the function f(x).<br />

Similarly the value of f(x) is said to be minimum at x<br />

= b if there exists a small positive number δ such that<br />

f(b) < f(x) ∀ x ∈ (b – δ, b + δ)<br />

Also then the point x = b is called a minimum point<br />

for f(x)<br />

Hence we find that :<br />

(i) x = a is a maximum point of f(x)<br />

⇔ ⎨ ⎧ f (a) – f(a + h) > 0<br />

⎩ f(a) – f(a – h) > 0<br />

(ii) x = b is a minimum point of f(x)<br />

⇔ ⎨ ⎧ f (b) – f(b + h) < 0<br />

⎩ f(b) – f(b – h) > 0<br />

(iii) x = c is neither a maximum point nor a minimum<br />

point<br />

⎪⎧<br />

f (c) – f(c + h) ⎪⎫<br />

⇔ ⎨ and ⎬ have opposite signs.<br />

⎪⎩ f(c) − f(c − h) ⎪⎭<br />

Where h is a very small positive number.<br />

Note :<br />

The maximum and minimum points are also<br />

known as extreme points.<br />

A function may have more than one maximum<br />

and minimum points.<br />

A maximum value of a function f(x) in an interval<br />

[a, b] is not necessarily its greatest value in that<br />

interval. Similarly a minimum value may not be<br />

the least value of the function. A minimum value<br />

may be greater than some maximum value for a<br />

function.<br />

The greatest and least values of a function f(x) in<br />

an interval [a, b] may be determined as follows :<br />

Greatest value = max. {f(a), f(b), f(c)}<br />

Least value = min. {f(a), f(b), f(c)}<br />

where x = c is a point such that f´(c) = 0.<br />

If a continuous function has only one maximum<br />

(minimum) point, then at this point function has<br />

its greatest (least) value.<br />

Monotonic functions do not have extreme points.<br />

Conditions for maxima and minima of a function<br />

Necessary condition : A point x = a is an extreme<br />

point of a function f(x) if f´(a) = 0, provided f´(a)<br />

exists. Thus if f´(a) exists, then<br />

x = a is an extreme point ⇒ f´(a) = 0 or<br />

f´(a) ≠ 0 ⇒ x = a is not an extreme point<br />

But its converse is not true i.e.<br />

f´(a) = 0 /⇒ x = a is an extreme point.<br />

For example if f(x) = x 3 , then f´(0) = 0 but x = 0 is<br />

not an extreme point.<br />

Sufficient condition : For a given function f(x), a<br />

point x = a is<br />

a maximum point if f´(a) = 0 and f´´(a) < 0<br />

a minimum point if f´(a) = 0 and f´´(a) > 0<br />

not an extreme point if f´(a) = 0 = f´´(a) and<br />

f´´´(a) ≠ 0.<br />

Note : If f´(a) = 0, f´´(a) = 0, f´´´(a) = 0 then the sign<br />

of f (4) (a) will determine the maximum or minimum<br />

point as above.<br />

Working Method :<br />

Find f´(x) and f´´(x).<br />

Solve f´(x) = 0. Let its roots be a, b, c, ...<br />

Determine the sign of f´´(x) at x = a, b, c, .... and<br />

decide the nature of the point as mentioned above.<br />

Properties of maxima and minima :<br />

If f(x) is continuous function, then<br />

Between two equal values of f(x), there lie atleast one<br />

maxima or minima.<br />

Maxima and minima occur alternately. For example<br />

if x = –1, 2, 5 are extreme points of a continuous<br />

function and if x = –1 is a maximum point then x = 2<br />

will be a minimum point and x = 5 will be a<br />

maximum point.<br />

When x passes a maximum point, the sign of dy/dx<br />

changes from + ve to – ve, where as when x passes<br />

through a minimum point, the sign of f´(x) changes<br />

from –ve to + ve.<br />

If there is no change in the sign of dy/dx on two sides<br />

of a point, then such a point is not an extreme point.<br />

If f(x) is maximum (minimum) at a point x = a, then<br />

1/f(x), [f(x) ≠ 0] will be minimum (maximum) at that<br />

point.<br />

If f(x) is maximum (minimum) at a point x = a, then<br />

for any λ ∈ R, λ + f(x), log f(x) and for any k > 0, k<br />

f(x), [f(x)] k are also maxmimum (minimum) at that<br />

point.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 52 DECEMBER 2009


MATH<br />

FUNCTION<br />

Mathematics Fundamentals<br />

Definition of a Function :<br />

Let A and B be two sets and f be a rule under which<br />

every element of A is associated to a unique element<br />

of B. Then such a rule f is called a function from A to<br />

B and symbolically it is expressed as<br />

f : A → B<br />

If f and g are two functions then their sum,<br />

difference, product, quotient and composite are<br />

denoted by<br />

f + g, f – g, fg, f/g, fog<br />

and they are defined as follows :<br />

(f + g) (x) = f(x) + g(x)<br />

or<br />

A ⎯→<br />

f<br />

B<br />

(f – g) (x) = f(x) – g(x)<br />

Function as a Set of Ordered Pairs<br />

Every function f : A → B can be considered as a set<br />

of ordered pairs in which first element is an element<br />

of A and second is the image of the first element.<br />

Thus<br />

f = {a, f(a) /a ∈ A, f(a) ∈ B}.<br />

Domain, Codomain and Range of a Function :<br />

If f : A → B is a function, then A is called domain of<br />

f and B is called codomain of f. Also the set of all<br />

images of elements of A is called the range of f and it<br />

is expressed by f(A). Thus<br />

f(A) = {f(a) |a ∈ A}<br />

obviously f(A) ⊂ B.<br />

Note : Generally we denote domain of a function f by<br />

D f and its range by R f.<br />

Equal Functions :<br />

Two functions f and g are said to be equal functions<br />

if<br />

domain of f = domain of g<br />

codomain of f = codomain of g<br />

f(x) = g(x) ∀ x.<br />

Algebra of Functions :<br />

(fg) (x) = f(x) f(g)<br />

(f/g) (x) = f(x)/g(x) (g(x) ≠ 0)<br />

(fog) (x) = f[g(x)]<br />

Formulae for domain of functions :<br />

D f ± g = D f ∩ D g<br />

D fg = D f ∩ D g<br />

D f/g = D f ∩ D g ∩ {x |g(x) ≠ 0}<br />

D gof = {x ∈ D f | f(x) ∈ D g }<br />

D = D<br />

f f ∩ {x |f(x) ≥ 0}<br />

Classification of Functions<br />

1. Algebraic and Transcendental Functions :<br />

Algebraic functions : If the rule of the function<br />

consists of sum, difference, product, power or<br />

roots of a variable, then it is called an algebraic<br />

function.<br />

Transcendental Functions : Those functions<br />

which are not algebraic are named as<br />

transcendental or non algebraic functions.<br />

2. Even and Odd Functions :<br />

Even functions : If by replacing x by –x in f(x)<br />

there in no change in the rule then f(x) is called an<br />

even function. Thus<br />

f(x) is even ⇔ f(–x) = f(x)<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 53 DECEMBER 2009


Odd function : If by replacing x by –x in f(x)<br />

there is only change of sign of f(x) then f(x) is<br />

called an odd function. Thus<br />

f(x) is odd ⇔ f(–x) = – f(x)<br />

3. Explicit and Implicit Functions :<br />

Explicit function : A function is said to be<br />

explicit if its rule is directly expressed (or can be<br />

expressed( in terms of the independent variable.<br />

Such a function is generally written as<br />

y = f(x), x = g(y) etc.<br />

Implicit function : A function is said to be<br />

implicit if its rule cannot be expressed directly in<br />

terms of the independent variable. Symbolically<br />

we write such a function as<br />

f(x, y) = 0, φ(x, y) = 0 etc.<br />

4. Continuous and Discontinuous Functions :<br />

Continuous functions : A functions is said to be<br />

continuous if its graph is continuous i.e. there is<br />

no gap or break or jump in the graph.<br />

Discontinuous Functions : A function is said to<br />

be discontinuous if it has a gap or break in its<br />

graph atleast at one point. Thus a function which<br />

is not continuous is named as discontinuous.<br />

5. Increasing and Decreasing Functions :<br />

Increasing Functions : A function f(x) is said to<br />

be increasing function if for any x 1 , x 2 of its<br />

domain<br />

x 1 < x 2 ⇒ f(x 1 ) ≤ f(x 2 )<br />

or x 1 > x 2 ⇒ f(x 1 ) ≥ f(x 2 )<br />

Decreasing Functions : A function f(x) is said to<br />

be decreasing function if for any x 1 , x 2 of its<br />

domain<br />

x 1 < x 2 ⇒ f(x 1 ) ≥ f(x 2 )<br />

or x 1 > x 2 ⇒ f(x 1 ) ≤ f(x 2 )<br />

Periodic Functions :<br />

A functions f(x) is called a periodic function if there<br />

exists a positive real number T such that<br />

f(x + T) = f(x).<br />

∀ x<br />

Also then the least value of T is called the period of<br />

the function f(x).<br />

Period of f(x) = T<br />

⇒ Period of f(nx + a) = T/n<br />

Periods of some functions :<br />

Function<br />

sin x, cos x, sec x, cosec x,<br />

tan x, cot x<br />

sin n x, cos n x, sec n x, cosec n x<br />

tan n x, cot n x<br />

|sin x|, |cos x|, |sec x|, |cosec x|<br />

|tan x|, |cot x|,<br />

2π<br />

|sin x| + |cos x|, sin 4 x + cos 4 x π<br />

|sec x| + |cosec x| 2<br />

|tan x| + |cot x|<br />

x – [x] 1<br />

π<br />

Period<br />

2π if n is odd<br />

π if n is even<br />

π ∀ n ∈ N<br />

π<br />

π<br />

π<br />

2<br />

Period of f(x) = T ⇒ period of f(ax + b) = T/|a|<br />

Period of f 1 (x) = T 1 , period fo f 2 (x) = T 2<br />

⇒ period of a f 1 (x) + bf 2 (x) ≤ LCM {T 1 , T 2 }<br />

Kinds of Functions :<br />

One-one/ May one Functions :<br />

A function f : A → B is said to be one-one if<br />

different elements of A have their different<br />

images in B.<br />

Thus<br />

⎧ a ≠ b<br />

⎪<br />

f is one-one ⇔ ⎨<br />

⎪<br />

⎩f<br />

(a) = f (b)<br />

⇒<br />

or<br />

⇒<br />

f (a)<br />

≠ f (b)<br />

a = b<br />

A function which is not one-one is called many<br />

one. Thus if f is many one then atleast two<br />

different elements have same f-image.<br />

Onto/Into Functions : A function f : A → B is<br />

said to be onto if range of f = codomain of f<br />

Thus f is onto ⇔ f(A) = B<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 54 DECEMBER 2009


Hence f : A → B is onto if every element of B<br />

(co-domain) has its f–preimage in A (domain).<br />

A function which is not onto is named as into<br />

function. Thus f : A → B is into if f(A) ≠ B. i.e.,<br />

if there exists atleast one element in codomain of<br />

f which has no preimage in domain.<br />

Note :<br />

Total number of functions : If A and B are finite<br />

sets containing m and n elements respectively,<br />

then<br />

total number of functions which can be defined<br />

from A to B = n m .<br />

total number of one-one functions from A to B<br />

=<br />

⎪⎩<br />

⎪ ⎨<br />

⎧<br />

n<br />

p m<br />

0<br />

if<br />

if<br />

m ≤ n<br />

m > n<br />

total number of onto functions from A to B (if m<br />

≥ n) = total number of different n groups of m<br />

elements.<br />

Composite of Functions :<br />

Let f : A → B and g : B → C be two functions, then<br />

the composite of the functions f and g denoted by<br />

gof, is a function from A to C given by gof : A → C,<br />

(gof) (x) = g[f(x)].<br />

Properties of Composite Function :<br />

The following properties of composite functions can<br />

easily be established.<br />

Composite of functions is not commutative i.e.,<br />

fog ≠ gof<br />

Composite of functions is associative i.e.<br />

(fog)oh = fo(goh)<br />

Composite of two bijections is also a bijection.<br />

Inverse Function :<br />

If f : A → B is one-one onto, then the inverse of f i.e.,<br />

f –1 is a function from B to A under which every b ∈ B<br />

is associated to that a ∈ A for which f(a) = b.<br />

Thus f –1 : B → A,<br />

f –1 (b) = a ⇔ f(a) = b.<br />

Domain and Range of some standard functions :<br />

Function Domain Range<br />

Polynomial<br />

function<br />

Identity<br />

function x<br />

Constant<br />

function c<br />

Reciprocal<br />

function 1/x<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

{c}<br />

R 0 R 0<br />

x 2 , |x| R R + ∪ {0}<br />

x 3 , x |x| R R<br />

Signum<br />

function<br />

R {–1, 0, 1}<br />

x + |x| R R + ∪ {0}<br />

x – |x| R R – ∪ {0}<br />

[x] R Z<br />

x – [x] R [0, 1)<br />

x [0, ∞) [0, ∞)<br />

a x R R +<br />

log x R + R<br />

sin x R [–1, 1]<br />

cos x R [–1, 7]<br />

tan x<br />

R – {± π/2, ± 3π/2, ...} R<br />

cot x R – {0, ± π. ± 2π, ..... R<br />

sec x R – (± π/2, ± 3π/2, ..... R – (–1, 1)<br />

cosec x R – {0, ±π, ± 2π, ......} R –(–1, 1)<br />

sinh x R R<br />

cosh x R [1, ∞)<br />

tanh x R (–1, 1)<br />

coth x R 0 R –[1, –1]<br />

sech x R (0, 1]<br />

cosech x R 0 R 0<br />

sin –1 x [–1, 1] [–π/2, π/2]<br />

cos –1 x [–1, 1] [0, π]<br />

tan –1 x R (–π/2, π/2}<br />

cot –1 x R (0, π)<br />

sec –1 x R –(–1, 1) [0, π] – {π/2}<br />

cosec –1 x R – (–1, 1) (– π/2, π/2] – {0}<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 55 DECEMBER 2009


Based on New Pattern<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

XtraEdge Test Series # 8<br />

Time : 3 Hours<br />

Syllabus :<br />

Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus<br />

Instructions :<br />

Section - I<br />

• Question 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for correct<br />

answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.<br />

• Question 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions with multiple correct answer. +4 marks and -1 mark for wrong answer.<br />

Section - II<br />

• Question 10 to 11 are Column Matching type questions. +8 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly<br />

matched answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer. However, +2 marks will be given for a correctly<br />

marked answer in any row.<br />

Section - III<br />

• Question 12 to 19 are numerical response type questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and -1 mark<br />

for wrong answer.<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. A deuterium plasma is a neutral mixture of<br />

negatively charged electrons and positively charged<br />

deuterium charged electrons and positively charged<br />

deuterium nuclei. Temperature required to produced<br />

fusion in deuterium plasma is : (Take the range of<br />

nuclear forces 2 fermi)<br />

(A) 835 K<br />

(B) 835 × 10 7 K<br />

(C) 8.35 × 10 7 K (D) 273 K<br />

2. As observed in the laboratory system, a 6 MeV<br />

proton is incident on a stationary 12 C target velocity<br />

of center of mass of the system is : (Take mass of<br />

proton to be 1 amu)<br />

(A) 2.6 × 10 6 m/s (B) 6.2 × 10 6 m/s<br />

(C) 10 × 10 6 m/s (D) 10 m/s<br />

3. Find the de Broglie wavelength of Earth. Mass of<br />

Earth is 6 × 10 24 kg. Mean orbital radius of Earth<br />

around Sun is 150 × 10 6 km -<br />

(A) 3.7 m<br />

(B) 3.7 × 10 –63 m<br />

(C) 3.7 × 10 63 m (D) 3.7 × 10 –63 cm<br />

4. A particle starts from rest and travels a distance x<br />

with uniform acceleration, then moves uniformly a<br />

distance 2x and finally comes at rest after moving<br />

further 5x distance with uniform retardation. The<br />

ratio of maximum speed to average speed is -<br />

5<br />

5<br />

(A) (B) 2 3<br />

(C) 4<br />

7<br />

(D) 5<br />

7<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

5. A body moves in a circular path of radius R with<br />

deceleration so that at any moment of time its<br />

tangential and normal accelerations are equal in<br />

magnitude. At the initial moment t = 0, the velocity<br />

of body is v 0 then the velocity of body will be-<br />

(A)<br />

(B) v =<br />

v0<br />

v = at time t<br />

⎛ v0t<br />

⎞<br />

1 + ⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ R ⎠<br />

v 0 e<br />

−S/<br />

R<br />

after it has moved S meter<br />

(C) v = v 0 e –SR after it has moved S meter<br />

(D) None of these<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 56 DECEMBER 2009


6. Three identical rods of same material are joined to<br />

form a triangular shape ABC as shown. Angles at<br />

edge A and C are respectively θ 1 and θ 2 as shown.<br />

When this triangular shape is heated then -<br />

A<br />

B<br />

θ 1<br />

(A) θ 1 decreases and θ 2 increases<br />

(B) θ 1 increases and θ 2 decreases<br />

(C) θ 1 increases<br />

(D) θ 2 increases<br />

7. Direction of current in coil (2) is opposite to<br />

direction of current in coil (1) and coil (3). All three<br />

coils are coaxial and equidistant coil (1) and coil (3)<br />

are fixed while coil (2) is suspended thus able to<br />

move freely. Then -<br />

R<br />

θ 2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

(A) coil (2) is in equilibrium<br />

(B) equilibrium state of coil (2) is stable<br />

equilibrium along axial direction<br />

(C) equilibrium state of coil (2) is unstable<br />

equilibrium along axial direction<br />

(D) if direction of current in coil (2) is same as that<br />

of coil (1) and coil (3) then state of equilibrium<br />

of coil (2) along axial direction is unstable<br />

8. Which of the following statements are correct about<br />

the circuits shown in the figure where 1 Ω and 0.5<br />

Ω are internal resistances of the 6 V and 12 V<br />

batteries respectively –<br />

P<br />

R<br />

4Ω<br />

6V, 1Ω<br />

R<br />

C<br />

12V, 0.5Ω<br />

Q<br />

0.5Ω<br />

(A) The potential at point P is 6 V<br />

(B) The potential at point Q is – 0.5 V<br />

(C) If a voltmeter is connected across the 6 V<br />

battery, it will read 7 V<br />

(D) If a voltmeter is connected across the 6 V<br />

battery, it will read 5 V<br />

S<br />

R<br />

9. In passing through a boundary refraction will not<br />

take place if -<br />

(A) light is incident normally on the boundary<br />

(B) the indices of refraction of the two media are same<br />

(C) the boundary is not visible<br />

(D) angle of incidence is lesser than angle of<br />

refraction but greater then sin –1 ⎛ µ<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

R<br />

⎝ µ D ⎠<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. Match column I with column II in the light of<br />

possibility of occurrence of phenomena listed in<br />

column I using the systems in column II -<br />

Column-I Column-II<br />

(A) Interference<br />

(B) Diffraction<br />

(C) Polarisation<br />

(D) Reflection<br />

(P) Non-mechanical<br />

waves<br />

(Q) Electromagnetic<br />

waves<br />

(R) Visible light<br />

(S) Sound waves<br />

(T) None<br />

11. Column-I Column-II<br />

(A) 5000 Å (P) De-Broglie wavelength of<br />

electron in x-ray tube<br />

(B) 1 Å<br />

(Q) Photoelectric threshold<br />

wavelength<br />

(C) 0.1 Å (R) x-ray wavelength<br />

(D) 10 Å (S) De-Broglie wavelength of<br />

most energetic photoelectron<br />

emitted from metal surface<br />

(T) None<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 57 DECEMBER 2009


This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbe rs in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

12. The minimum speed in m/s with which a projectile<br />

must be thrown from origin at ground so that it is able to<br />

pass through a point P (30 m, 40 m) is : (g = 10 m/s 2 )<br />

(Ans. in .............. × 10)<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

between the particles in process of their motion in<br />

meters is (g = 10 m/s 2 ).<br />

u = 2 m/s<br />

A 45°<br />

9m v = 14 m/s<br />

B<br />

22m<br />

45°<br />

17. Consider the circuit shown in figure. What is the<br />

current through the battery just after the switch is<br />

closed.<br />

18V<br />

S<br />

2mH<br />

9Ω<br />

9Ω<br />

9Ω<br />

2mH<br />

18. A rectangular plate of mass 20 kg is suspended from<br />

points A and B as shown. If the pin B is suddenly<br />

removed then the angular acceleration in rad/sec 2 of<br />

the plate is : (g = 10 m/s 2 ).<br />

A<br />

B<br />

13. In U 238 ore containing Uranium the ratio of U 234 to<br />

Pb 206 nuclei is 3. Assuming that all the lead present in<br />

the ore is final stable product of U 238 . Half life of<br />

U 238 to be 4.5 × 10 9 years and find the age of ore.<br />

(in 10 9 years)<br />

l =0.2m<br />

b =0.15m<br />

14. Under standard conditions the gas density is<br />

1.3 mg/cm 3 and the velocity of sound propagation in<br />

it is 330 m/s, then the number of degrees of freedom<br />

of gas is.<br />

15. A single conservative force acts on a body of mass<br />

1 kg that moves along the x-axis. The potential energy<br />

U(x) is given by U (x) = 20 + (x – 2) 2 , where x is in<br />

meters. At x = 5.0 m the particle has a kinetic energy of<br />

20 J, then the maximum kinetic energy of body in J is.<br />

(Ans. in .............. × 10)<br />

16. Two particles are simultaneously thrown from top of<br />

two towers with making angle 45º with horizontal.<br />

Their velocities are 2 m/s and 14 m/s. Horizontal and<br />

vertical separation between these particles are 22 m<br />

and 9 m respectively. Then the minimum separation<br />

19. If the temperature of a gas is raised by 1 K from<br />

27ºC. Find the percentage change in speed of sound.<br />

(Speed = 300 ms –1 )<br />

(Ans. in .............. × 10 2 )<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. In the precipitation of sulphides of second group<br />

basic radicals. H 2 S is passed into acidified solution<br />

with dilute HCl. If the solution is not acidified, then<br />

which of the following is correct ?<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 58 DECEMBER 2009


(A) Only the sulphides of second group get<br />

precipitated<br />

(B) Only the sulphides of fourth group get<br />

precipitated<br />

(C) Neither of the sulphides of second and fourth<br />

groups get pricipitated<br />

(D) Sulphides of both the groups second and fourth<br />

get precipitated<br />

2. The geometrical shapes of XeF + 2–<br />

5 , XeF 6 and XeF 8<br />

respectively are -<br />

(A) trigonal bipyramidal, octahedral and square<br />

planar<br />

(B) square based pyramidal, distorted octahedral and<br />

octahedral<br />

(C) planar pentagonal, octahedral and square anti<br />

prismatic<br />

(D) square based pyramidal, distorted octahedral and<br />

square anti prismatic<br />

3. Regarding graphite the following informations are<br />

available :<br />

3.35Å<br />

Top view<br />

5. The difference between ortho and para hydrogen<br />

is/are -<br />

(A) they are electron spin isomer, where the spins of<br />

electrons are opposite<br />

(B) ortho hydrogen is more stable at lower<br />

temperature<br />

(C) they are nuclear spin isomer, where the spins of<br />

protons are same in para and different in ortho<br />

isomer<br />

(D) they are nuclear spin isomers, where the spins of<br />

protons are opposite in para but same in ortho<br />

isomer<br />

6. NGP assistance support for S N 2 reaction will be seen<br />

in -<br />

(A)<br />

(C)<br />

OH<br />

Cl<br />

OH<br />

Θ<br />

COO<br />

(B) CH 3 –S–CH 2 –CH 2 –Cl<br />

(D)<br />

OH<br />

7. When the compound called isoborneol is heated with<br />

50% sulfuric acid the product of the reaction is/are ?<br />

HO<br />

Cl<br />

Isoborneol<br />

The density of graphite = 2.25 gm/cm 3 . What is C–C<br />

bond distance in graphite ?<br />

(A) 1.68Å (B) 1.545Å<br />

(C) 2.852 Å (D) 1.426Å<br />

(A)<br />

(C)<br />

(B)<br />

(D)<br />

4. The molecular formula of a non-stoichiometric tin<br />

oxide containing Sn(II) and Sn (IV) ions is Sn 4.44 O 8 .<br />

Therefore, the molar ratio of Sn(II) to Sn(IV) is<br />

approximately -<br />

(A) 1 : 8 (B) 1 : 6<br />

(C) 1 : 4 (D) 1 : 1<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

8. Regarding the radial probability distribution<br />

(4nr 2 R 2 nl) vs r plot which of the following is/are<br />

correct ?<br />

(A) The number of maxima is (n-l)<br />

(B) The number of nodal points is (n-l-1)<br />

(C) The radius at which the radial probability density<br />

reaches to maxima is 3s < 3p < 3d<br />

(D) The number of angular nodes is l<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 59 DECEMBER 2009


9. H 2 C 2 O 4 and NaHC 2 O 4 behave as acids as well as<br />

reducing agents which is/are correct statement (s) ?<br />

(A) Equivalent wt. of H 2 C 2 O 4 and NaHC 2 O 4 are<br />

equal to their molecular weights when behaving<br />

as reducing agent<br />

(B) 100 mL of 1N solution of each is neutralised by<br />

equal volumes of 1M Ca(OH) 2<br />

(C) 100 mL of 1N solution of each is neutralised by<br />

equal volumes of 1N Ca(OH) 2<br />

(D) 100 mL of 1M solution of each is oxidised by<br />

equal volumes of 1M KMnO 4<br />

(B)<br />

(C)<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Br<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Br<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

P Q R S T<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. Column-I Column-II<br />

⎛ a ⎞<br />

(A) If force of attraction (P) ⎜P<br />

+ ⎟<br />

⎝ V 2<br />

(V–b)= RT<br />

⎠<br />

among the gas molecules<br />

be negligible<br />

(B) If the volume of the (Q) PV = RT –a/V<br />

gas molecules be<br />

negligible<br />

(C) At STP (for real gas) (R) PV = RT + Pb<br />

(D) At low pressure and (S) PV = RT<br />

at high temperature<br />

(T) PV/RT = 1–a/VRT<br />

11. Column-I<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Cl<br />

(D)<br />

Me<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Br<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Br<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Column-II<br />

(P) Optically active<br />

(Q) Cis compound<br />

(R) Trans compound<br />

(S) Optically inactive<br />

(T) Chiral axis (element of chirality)<br />

Cl<br />

Me<br />

This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

(A)<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

Me<br />

12. What is the number of lone pair on the molecule<br />

XeO 2 F 2 ?<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 60 DECEMBER 2009


13. 15g of a solute in 100g water makes a solution freeze<br />

at –1ºC. What will be the depression in freezing point<br />

if 30g of a solute is dissolved in 100g of water ?<br />

14. The half lives of decomposition of gaseous CH 3 CHO<br />

at constant temperature but at initial pressure of<br />

364mm and 170mm Hg were 410 second and 880<br />

second respectively. Hence what is the order of<br />

reaction.<br />

15. The number of S–S bonds in sulphur trioxide trimer<br />

(S 3 O 9 ) is ....... .<br />

16. The number of peroxo linkages present in the<br />

[H 4 B 2 O 8 ] 2– is ..... .<br />

17. The maximum number of structural isomers (acyclic<br />

and cyclic) possible for C 4 H 8 are ....... .<br />

18. What is the no. of lone pair of electrons present on N<br />

in Trisilylamine ?<br />

19. A small amount of solution containing 24 Na with<br />

activity 2 × 10 3 dps was administered into the blood<br />

of patient in a hospital. After 5 hour a sample of the<br />

blood drawn out from the patient shared an activity<br />

of 16 dps per cm 3 . (t 1/2 of 24 Na = 15 hrs.) Find the<br />

volume (in L) of blood in patient.<br />

[Given : log 1.2598 = 0.1003]<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. The largest term in the expansion of (3 + 2x) 50 , where<br />

x = 1/5, is -<br />

(A) 5th<br />

(B) 6th<br />

(C) 8th<br />

(D) 9th<br />

1<br />

2. If sin<br />

–1 ⎡ 3sin 2θ<br />

⎤<br />

2<br />

⎢ ⎥ = tan –1 x, then x =<br />

⎣5+<br />

4cos 2θ⎦<br />

(A) tan 3θ<br />

(B) 3 tan θ<br />

(C) (1/3) tan θ<br />

(D) 3 cot θ<br />

3.<br />

(cos x −1)(cos x − e<br />

The integer n for which lim<br />

x→0<br />

n<br />

x<br />

a finite nonzero number is -<br />

(A) 1 (B) 2<br />

(C) 3 (D) 4<br />

x<br />

)<br />

is<br />

x<br />

4. If f(x) = and g(x) =<br />

sin x<br />

then in this interval -<br />

x<br />

tan x<br />

where 0 < x ≤ 1,<br />

(A) both f(x) and g(x) are increasing functions<br />

(B) both f(x) and g(x) are decreasing functions<br />

(C) f(x) is an increasing function<br />

(D) g(x) is an increasing function<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

5. If a, b, c are in A.P., and a 2 , b 2 , c 2 are in H.P., then<br />

(A) a = b = c<br />

(C) a, b, c are in H.P.<br />

(B) a, b, – 2<br />

1 c are in G.P.<br />

(D) – 2<br />

1 a, b, c are in G.P.<br />

6. The system of equations<br />

–2x + y + z = a<br />

x – 2y + z = b<br />

x = y – 2z = c<br />

has<br />

(A) no solution if a + b + c ≠ 0<br />

(B) unique solution if a + b + c = 0<br />

(C) infinite number of solutions if a + b + c = 0<br />

(D) none of these<br />

7.<br />

x<br />

The function f(x) =<br />

1+<br />

| x |<br />

is differentiable on -<br />

(A) (0, ∞) (B) [0, ∞)<br />

(C) (–∞, 0)<br />

(D) (– ∞,∞)<br />

4 2<br />

x sinx + cos x⎛ x cos x x sin x cos x ⎞<br />

8. If l = e ⎜<br />

− +<br />

⎟<br />

∫<br />

dx<br />

2 2<br />

x cos x<br />

⎝<br />

⎠<br />

then l equals -<br />

(A) e x s in x ⎛ sec x ⎞<br />

+ cos x ⎜x<br />

− ⎟ + C<br />

⎝ x ⎠<br />

(B) e x s in x ⎛ cosx<br />

⎞<br />

+ cos x ⎜x<br />

sin x − ⎟<br />

⎝ x ⎠<br />

(C) e x s in x ⎛<br />

+ cos x ⎜<br />

⎝<br />

(D) xe x sin x+cos x –<br />

∫<br />

x<br />

tan x<br />

e<br />

secx<br />

⎞<br />

− ⎟ + C x ⎠<br />

x sinx + cos x<br />

⎛ cos x − x sin x ⎞<br />

⎜1−<br />

⎟ dx<br />

2 2<br />

⎝ x cos x ⎠<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 61 DECEMBER 2009


9.<br />

y ⎛ x<br />

If for the differential equation y′ = + φ x ⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

⎝ y ⎠<br />

the<br />

x<br />

general solution is y =<br />

log | Cx |<br />

then f (x / y) is<br />

given by -<br />

(A) – x 2 / y 2 (B) y 2 / x 2<br />

(C) x 2 / y 2 (D) – y 2 / x 2<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

P Q R S T<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. The domain of the functions<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) sin –1 (x/2 – 1) (P) (3 – 2π, 3 – π) ∪ (3,4]<br />

+ log (x – [x])<br />

2<br />

(B) e x + 5sin π / 16 − x (Q)(0, 4) – {1, 2, 3}<br />

(C) log 10 sin (x – 3) (R)[– π/4, π/4]<br />

2<br />

+ 16 − x<br />

(D) cos –1 1− 2x<br />

4<br />

2<br />

(S) [– 3/2, 5/2]<br />

(T) None<br />

11. Column-I Column-II<br />

I denotes an integral<br />

(A)<br />

∫ π x log sin x dx (P) I = (π/8) log 2<br />

0<br />

(B)<br />

∫ ∞ 2<br />

log (x+x –1 dx − π<br />

) (Q) I = log 2<br />

0<br />

2<br />

1+<br />

x<br />

2<br />

(C)<br />

∫ π / 4<br />

log (1+ tan x)dx (R) I = π log 2<br />

0<br />

(D)<br />

∫ π log (1 – cos x)dx (S) I = π log 2<br />

0<br />

(T) None<br />

This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

12. Suppose X follows a binomial distribution with<br />

parameters n = 6 and p. If 9P(X = 4) = P(X = 2), find<br />

4p.<br />

13. If Q is the foot of the perpendicular from the point<br />

x − 5 y + z − 6<br />

P(4, –5,3) on the line = = then<br />

3 − 42<br />

5<br />

100 (PQ) 2 is equal to<br />

457<br />

14. If a = (0, 1, –1) and c = (1, 1, 1) are given vectors,<br />

then |b| 2 where b satisfies a × b + c = 0 and a . b = 3<br />

is equal to<br />

15. ABC is an isosceles triangle inscribed in a circle of<br />

radius r. If AB = AC and h is the altitude from A to<br />

BC. If the triangle ABC has perimeter P and area ∆<br />

then lim 512r ∆<br />

h→0<br />

3 is equal to<br />

p<br />

16. If f(x) = sin x, x ≠ n π, n = 0, ± 1, ± 2, .....<br />

= 0 otherwise<br />

and g(x) = x 2 + 1, x ≠ 0, 2<br />

= 4 x = 0<br />

= 5 x = 2<br />

then lim g(f(x)) is .....<br />

x→0<br />

17. If y = (1 + 1/x) x 2 y 2(2)<br />

+ 1/8<br />

then<br />

is equal to<br />

(log 3/ 2 −1/3)<br />

18. If the greatest value of y = x/log x on [e, e 3 ] is u then<br />

e 3 /u is equal to<br />

19. If z ≠ 0 and 2 + cos θ + i sin θ = 3/z, then find the<br />

value of 2(z + z ) – |z| 2 .<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 62 DECEMBER 2009


Based on New Pattern<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011<br />

XtraEdge Test Series # 8<br />

Time : 3 Hours<br />

Syllabus :<br />

Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus<br />

Instructions :<br />

Section - I<br />

• Question 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for correct<br />

answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.<br />

• Question 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions with multiple correct answer. +4 marks and -1 mark for wrong answer.<br />

Section - II<br />

• Question 10 to 11 are Column Matching type questions. +8 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly<br />

matched answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer. However, +2 marks will be given for a correctly<br />

marked answer in any row.<br />

Section - III<br />

• Question 12 to 19 are numerical response type questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and -1 mark<br />

for wrong answer.<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. Velocity of block 2 shown in figure is -<br />

u<br />

(A)<br />

3u<br />

2<br />

(B)<br />

3u<br />

2<br />

u<br />

1<br />

(C)<br />

60º<br />

3<br />

3u<br />

2<br />

2<br />

(D) 2u<br />

2. Which of the following restoring force can give rise<br />

to S.H.M -<br />

(A) F = 2x<br />

(B) F = 2 – 4x<br />

(C) F = – 2x 2<br />

(D) None of these<br />

3. A disk of mass M and radius R is rotating about its<br />

axis with angular velocity ω. Axis of disk is rotated<br />

by 90º in time ∆t. Average torque acting on disk is -<br />

2<br />

2Mω<br />

(A)<br />

∆t<br />

MR<br />

(C)<br />

2∆ω<br />

2<br />

t<br />

(B)<br />

MR 2 ω<br />

2∆t<br />

(D) Zero<br />

4. Select the incorrect statement -<br />

(A) The velocity of the centre of mass of an isolated<br />

system must stay constant<br />

(B) Only a net external force can change the<br />

velocity of the center of mass of a system<br />

(C) A system have non-zero kinetic energy but zero<br />

linear momentum<br />

(D) F<br />

→ ext<br />

d → v<br />

= m + → v dt<br />

dm is true for all situation<br />

dt<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

5. Velocity of a particle moving on straight line varies<br />

as 2<br />

1 th<br />

power of displacement. Then -<br />

(A) K.E. ∝ S (B) P ∝ S 1/2<br />

(C) a = constant (D) S ∝ t 2<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 63 DECEMBER 2009


6. A block of density ρ is floating in a liquid X kept in<br />

container. A liquid Y of density ρ′ (< ρ) is slowly<br />

poured into container –<br />

(A) The block will move up if liquid X and Y are<br />

immiscible<br />

(B) The block will sink more if liquid X and Y are<br />

immiscible<br />

(C) The block will sink more if liquid X and Y are<br />

miscible<br />

(D) The block will not move if liquid X and Y are<br />

miscible<br />

7. Six identical rod are connected as shown in figure<br />

and temperature difference of 100ºC is maintained<br />

across P and Q –<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. There are four identical rod having thermal<br />

resistance 10 Ω, each column I contains various<br />

arrangement of rod. Column II contains current<br />

flowing across point C when a temperature<br />

difference of 100ºC is maintained across A & B.<br />

Match them.<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

P A B Q<br />

(A) A<br />

C<br />

B<br />

(P) 2 J/sec<br />

C<br />

(A) Temperature of point 'A' is 50ºC<br />

(B) A<br />

C<br />

B<br />

(Q) 4 J/sec<br />

200<br />

(B) Temperature of point A is ºC<br />

3<br />

(C) Thermal current passing through B is zero<br />

(D) Thermal current passing through A is twice of<br />

that through C<br />

8. A solid iron cylinder A rolls down a ramp and an<br />

identical iron cylinder B slides down the same ramp<br />

without friction –<br />

(A) B reaches the bottom first<br />

(B) A and B have the same kinetic energy<br />

(C) B has greater translational kinetic energy than<br />

that of A<br />

(D) Linear speed of centre of mass of B is greater<br />

than that of A<br />

9. A mass and spring system oscillates with amplitude<br />

A and angular frequency ω –<br />

(A) The average speed during one complete cycle<br />

2Aω<br />

of oscillation is<br />

π<br />

(B) Maximum speed is ωA<br />

(C) Average velocity of particle during one<br />

complete cycle of oscillation is zero<br />

(D) Average acceleration of particle during one<br />

complete cycle of oscillation is zero<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

(C) A<br />

(D)<br />

A<br />

C<br />

C<br />

B<br />

B<br />

(R) 6 J/sec<br />

(S) 7<br />

20 J/sec<br />

(T) None<br />

11. A car of mass 500 kg is moving in a circular road<br />

of radius 35 / 3 . Angle of banking of road is<br />

30º. Coefficient of friction between road and tyres<br />

is µ =<br />

1 . Match the following:<br />

2 3<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) Maximum speed (in m/s) of (P) 5 2<br />

car for safe turning<br />

(B) Minimum speed (in m/s) of (Q) 12.50<br />

car for safe turning<br />

(C) Speed (in m/s) at which friction (R) 210<br />

force between tyres and road<br />

is zero<br />

(D) Friction force (in 10 2 Newton) (S)<br />

350<br />

3<br />

between tyres and road if<br />

speed is<br />

350 m/s<br />

6<br />

(T) None<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 64 DECEMBER 2009


This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbe rs in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

12. Pulley 'P' shown in figure is pulled upward with<br />

F = 2t N, where t is time in sec. Velocity of block<br />

of mass 1 at the time block 2 is about to lift is<br />

(in cm/sec). (Ans. in ................. × 10 1 )<br />

F = 2t<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

14. A longitudinal wave of frequency 220 Hz travels<br />

down a copper rod of radius 8.00 mm. The average<br />

power in the wave is 6.50 µW. The amplitude of the<br />

wave is n × 10 –8 m. Find n.<br />

15. A piston-cylinder device with air at an initial<br />

temperature of 30ºC undergoes an expansion<br />

process for which pressure and volume are related<br />

as given below<br />

P (kPa) 100 25 6.25<br />

V (m 3 ) 0.1 0.2 0.4<br />

The work done by the system is n × 10 3 J. Find n.<br />

16. The block connected with spring is pushed to<br />

compress the spring by 10 cm and then released. All<br />

surfaces are frictionless and collision are elastic.<br />

Time period of the motion in sec (mass of block = 9 kg<br />

and spring constant 4π 2 N/m).<br />

5 cm<br />

17. RMS velocity of gas at 27ºC is 300× 381 m/s.<br />

RMS velocity (in m/s) when temperature is<br />

increased four times is. (Ans. in ................. × 10 2 )<br />

2 1<br />

m 1 = 0.5 kg<br />

m 2 = 1 kg<br />

13. The upper edge of a gate in a dam runs along the<br />

water surface. The gate is 2.00 m high and 4.00 m<br />

wide and is hinged along a horizontal line through<br />

its center. The torque about the hinge arising from<br />

the force due to the water is (n × 10 4 Nm). Find<br />

value of n.<br />

18. A block of mass 2 kg is placed on a wedge of mass<br />

10 kg kept on a horizontal surface. Coefficient of<br />

friction between all surfaces is µ = 0.2. If block is<br />

slipping down the wedge with constant speed then<br />

friction force on wedge due to horizontal surface is<br />

(in Newton) :<br />

19. A particular quantity 'y' varies as 'x' as shown in<br />

figure. RMS value of y with respect to x for large<br />

values of 'x' is.<br />

2 m<br />

y<br />

60º 60º<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

x<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 65 DECEMBER 2009


CHEMISTRY<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. An ideal gaseous mixture of ethane (C 2 H 6 ) and<br />

ethene (C 2 H 4 ) occupies 28 litre at STP. The mixture<br />

reacts completely with 128 gm O 2 to produce CO 2<br />

and H 2 O. Mole fraction of C 2 H 4 in the mixture is -<br />

(A) 0.6 (B) 0.4 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.8<br />

2. A bulb of constant volume is attached to a<br />

manometer tube open at other end as shown in figure.<br />

The manometer is filled with a liquid of density<br />

(1/3 rd ) that of mercury. Initially h was 228 cm.<br />

(C) The first ionization energies of elements in a<br />

period do not increase with the increase in<br />

atomic numbers<br />

(D) For transition elements the d-subshells are filled<br />

with electrons monotonically with the increase<br />

in atomic number<br />

7. Which of the following statements regarding<br />

hydrogen peroxide is/are correct ?<br />

(A) Hydrogen peroxide is a pale blue viscous liquid<br />

(B) Hydrogen peroxide can act as oxidising as well<br />

as reducing agent<br />

(C) The two hydroxyl groups in hydrogen peroxide<br />

lie in the same plane<br />

(D) In the crystalline phase, H 2 O 2 is paramagnetic<br />

8. Which of the following is/are state function ?<br />

(A) q (B) q – w (C) q + w (D) q / w<br />

Gas<br />

h<br />

9. The IUPAC name of the following compound is -<br />

OH<br />

Through a small hole in the bulb gas leaked assuming<br />

dp<br />

pressure decreases as = – kP. dt<br />

If value of h is 114 cm after 14 minutes. What is the<br />

value of k (in hour –1 ) ?<br />

[Use : ln(4/3) = 0.28 and density of Hg = 13.6 g/mL]<br />

(A) 0.6 (B) 1.2<br />

(C) 2.4<br />

(D) None of these<br />

3. When 300 mL of 0.2 M HCl is added to 200 mL of<br />

0.1 M NaOH. Resultant solution require how many<br />

equivalent of Ba(OH) 2 ?<br />

(A) 0.06 (B) 0.12 (C) 0.3 (D) 0.04<br />

4. The dipole moment of HCl is 1.03D, if H–Cl bond<br />

distance is 1.26Å, what is the percentage of ionic<br />

character in the H–Cl bond ?<br />

(A) 60% (B) 29% (C) 17% (D) 39%<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

5. Consider the following carbides CaC 2 , BeC 2 , MgC 2<br />

and SrC 2 which of the given carbides on hydrolysis<br />

yield same product -<br />

(A) CaC 2 (B) Be 2 C (C) MgC 2 (D) SrC 2<br />

6. Which of the following is/are correct regarding the<br />

periodic classification of elements ?<br />

(A) The properties of elements are the periodic<br />

function of their atomic number<br />

(B) Non metals are lesser in number than metals<br />

Br<br />

CN<br />

(A) 3-Bromo-3-cyano phenol<br />

(B) 3-Bromo-5-hydroxy benzonitrile<br />

(C) 3-Cyano-3-hydroxybromo benzene<br />

(D) 5-Bromo-3-hydroxy benzonitrile<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

P Q R S T<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. Column-I Column-II<br />

(A) 5.4 g of Al<br />

(P) 0.5 N A electrons<br />

(B) 1.2 g of Mg 2+ (Q) 15.9994 amu<br />

(C) Exact atomic weight (R) 0.2 mole atoms<br />

of mixture of oxygen<br />

isotopes<br />

(D) 0.9 mL of H 2 O (S) 0.05 moles<br />

(T) 3.1 × 10 23 electrons<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 66 DECEMBER 2009


11. Column-I Column-II<br />

(Ionic species)<br />

(Shapes)<br />

+<br />

(A) XeF 5 (P) Tetrahedral<br />

–<br />

(B) SiF 5 (Q) Square planar<br />

+<br />

(C) AsF 4 (R) Trigonal bipyramidal<br />

–<br />

(D) ICl 4 (S) Square pyramidal<br />

(T) Octahedral<br />

This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbe rs in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

12. How much volume (in mL) 0.001 M HCl should we<br />

add to 10 cm 3 of 0.001 M NaOH to change its pH by<br />

one unit ?<br />

13. The stopcock, connecting the two bulbs of volumes<br />

5 litres and 10 litres containing an ideal gas at 9 atm<br />

and 6 atm respectively, is opened. What is the final<br />

presure (in atm) in the two bulbs if the temperature<br />

remained the same ?<br />

14. An acid type indicator, HIn differs in colour from its<br />

conjugate base (In – ). The human eye is sensitive to<br />

colour differences only when the ratio [In – ] / [HIn] is<br />

greater than 10 or smaller than 0.1. What should be<br />

the minimum change in the pH of the solution to<br />

osberve a complete colour change ? (K a = 1.5 × 10 –5 )<br />

15. What is the sum of total electron pairs (b.p. + l.p.)<br />

present in XeF 6 molecule ?<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

16. The number of geometrical isomers of<br />

CH 3 CH=CH–CH=CH–CH=CHCl is.<br />

17. At 200ºC, the velocity of hydrogen molecule is<br />

2.0 × 10 5 cm/sec. In this case the de-Broglie<br />

wavelength (in Å) is about.<br />

18. The equivalent weight of a metal is 4.5 and the<br />

molecular weight of its chloride is 80. The atomic<br />

weight of the metal is.<br />

19. No. of π bond in the compound H 2 CSF 4 is.<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Questions 1 to 4 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct.<br />

1. If 0 < r < s ≤ n and n P r = n P s , then value of r + s is -<br />

(A) 2n – 2 (B) 2n – 1<br />

(C) 2 (D) 1<br />

2. If sin x + sin 2 x + sin 3 x = 1, then cos 6 x – 4 cos 4 x +<br />

8 cos 2 x is equal to -<br />

(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 8<br />

3. If x is real, and<br />

2<br />

x − x + 1<br />

k = then<br />

2<br />

x + x + 1<br />

(A) 1/3 ≤ k ≤ 3 (B) k ≥ 5<br />

(C) k ≤ 0<br />

(D) none of these<br />

4. A flagstaff stands in the centre of a rectangular field<br />

whose diagonal is 1200 m, and subtends angles 15º<br />

and 45º at the mid points of the sides of the field. The<br />

height of the flagstaff is -<br />

(A) 200 m (B) 300 2 + 3 m<br />

(C) 300 2 − 3 m (D) 400 m<br />

Questions 5 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) is correct.<br />

5. If a, b, c are the sides of the ∆ABC and a 2 , b 2 , c 2 are<br />

the roots of x 3 – px 2 + qx – k = 0, then<br />

cos A cos B cosC<br />

p<br />

(A) + + =<br />

a b c 2 k<br />

4q − p<br />

(B) a cos A + b cos B + c cos C =<br />

2 k<br />

2p∆<br />

(C) a sin A + b sin B + c sin C =<br />

k<br />

(D) sin A sin B sin C =<br />

∆<br />

k<br />

8 3<br />

6. The coordinates of the feet of the perpendiculars<br />

from the vertices of a triangle on the opposite sides<br />

are (20, 25), (8, 16) and (8, 9). The coordinates of a<br />

vertex of the triangle are -<br />

(A) (5, 10) (B) (50, –5)<br />

(C) (15, 30) (D) (10, 15)<br />

2<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 67 DECEMBER 2009


⎡1<br />

1 ⎤ ⎡ ⎤<br />

7. Let E = ⎥ + 1 2<br />

⎢ + ⎢ + ⎥ + ... upto 50 terms, then -<br />

⎣3<br />

50 ⎦ ⎣3<br />

50 ⎦<br />

(A) E is divisible by exactly 2 primes<br />

(B) E is prime<br />

(C) E ≥ 30<br />

(D) E ≤ 35<br />

8. If m is a positive integer, then [( 3 + 1) ] + 1,<br />

where [x] denotes greatest integer ≤ n, is divisible<br />

by-<br />

(A) 2 m (B) 2 m+1 (C) 2 m+2 (D) 2 2m<br />

9. If A and B are acute angles such that sin A = sin 2 B,<br />

2 cos 2 A = 3 cos 2 B; then -<br />

(A) A = π/6 (B) A = π/2<br />

(C) B = π/4 (D) B = π/3<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 10 to 11).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and<br />

D-S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix<br />

should be as follows :<br />

P Q R S T<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

R<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

S<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

T<br />

10. For the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 6y – 19 = 0<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

72 226<br />

(A) Length of the tangent (P)<br />

113<br />

from (6, 4) to the circle<br />

(B) Length of the chord (Q) 113<br />

of contact from (6, 4)<br />

to the circle<br />

(C) Distance of (6, 4) (R) 113 – 32<br />

from the centre of the<br />

circle<br />

(D) Shortest distance of (S) 9<br />

(6, 4) from the circle<br />

(T) None<br />

11. Value of x when<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) 5 2 5 4 5 6 ... 5 2x = (0.04) –28 (P) 3 log 3 5<br />

⎛ 1 1 1 ⎞<br />

(B) x 2 log 5 ⎜ + + + ... ⎟<br />

=<br />

⎝ 4 8 16<br />

( 0.2)<br />

⎠<br />

(Q) 4<br />

⎛ 1 1 1<br />

log<br />

⎞<br />

2.5 ⎜ + + + ... ⎟<br />

⎝ 3 2 3<br />

3 3 ⎠<br />

(C) x = ( 0.16)<br />

(R) 2<br />

2m<br />

(D) 3 x–1 + 3 x–2 + 3 x–3 + ... (S) 7<br />

⎛ 2 1 1 ⎞<br />

= 2 ⎜5<br />

+ 5 + 1+<br />

+ + ... ⎟<br />

⎝ 5<br />

2<br />

5 ⎠<br />

(T) None<br />

This section contains 8 questions (Questions 12 to 19).<br />

The answer to each of the questions is a SINGLE-<br />

DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9. The<br />

appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR have to be darkened. For<br />

example, if the correct answers to question numbers X,<br />

Y, Z and W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then<br />

the correct darkening of bubbles will look like the<br />

following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

12. Fifteen persons, among whom are A and B, sit down at<br />

random at a round table. if p is The probability that<br />

there are exactly 4 persons between A and B find 14 p.<br />

13. If l is the length of the intercept made by a common<br />

tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 16 and the ellipse<br />

x 2 /25 + y 2 /4 = 1, on the coordinate axes, then<br />

81l<br />

2 + 3<br />

is equal to<br />

1059<br />

14. If x + y = k is a normal to the parabola y 2 = 12x, p is<br />

the length of the perpendicular from the focus of the<br />

3k<br />

3 2<br />

+ 2p<br />

parabola on this normal; then<br />

is equal to<br />

741<br />

15. The volume of the tetrahedron whose vertices are<br />

(0, 1, 2) (3, 0, 1) (4, 3, 6) (2, 3, 2) is equal to<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

16. Let a 1 = 2<br />

1 , ak+1 = a k 2 + a k ∀ k ≥ 1 and<br />

1 1 1<br />

x n = + + ... +<br />

a1 + 1 a 2 + 1 a n + 1<br />

Find [x 100 ] where [x] denotes the greatest integer ≤ x.<br />

17. Find the value of x which satisfy the equation<br />

log 2 (x 2 – 3) – log 2 (6x – 10) + 1 = 0<br />

18. Find the coefficient of x 2009 in the expansion of<br />

(1 – x) 2008 (1 + x + x 2 ) 2007<br />

1/ log x<br />

2<br />

19. Find the value of x satisfying 4 = 2.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 68 DECEMBER 2009


MOCK TEST PAPER-1<br />

CBSE BOARD PATTERN<br />

CLASS # XII<br />

SUBJECT : PHYSICS , CHEMISTRY & MATHEMATICS<br />

Solutions will be published in next issue<br />

General Instructions : Physics & Chemistry<br />

• Time given for each subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 70 for each.<br />

• All questions are compulsory.<br />

• Marks for each question are indicated against it.<br />

• Question numbers 1 to 8 are very short-answer questions and carrying 1 mark each.<br />

• Question numbers 9 to 18 are short-answer questions, and carry 2 marks each.<br />

• Question numbers 19 to 27 are also short-answer questions, and carry 3 marks each.<br />

• Question numbers 28 to 30 are long-answer questions and carry 5 marks each.<br />

• Use of calculators is not permitted.<br />

General Instructions : Mathematics<br />

• Time given to solve this subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 100.<br />

• All questions are compulsory.<br />

• The question paper consists of 29 questions divided into three sections A, B and C.<br />

Section A comprises of 10 questions of one mark each.<br />

Section B comprises of 12 questions of four marks each.<br />

Section C comprises of 7 questions of six marks each.<br />

• All question in Section A are to be answered in one word, one sentence or as per the exact requirement of the question.<br />

• There is no overall choice. However, internal choice has been provided in 4 questions of four marks each and<br />

2 question of six marks each. You have to attempt only one of the alternatives in all such questions.<br />

• Use of calculators is not permitted.<br />

PHYSICS<br />

1. q =<br />

q 0<br />

is valid or not, q is the charge on<br />

2<br />

v<br />

1−<br />

2<br />

c<br />

particle when it is moving with velocity v, q 0 is the<br />

rest charge and c is the velocity of light .<br />

2. A concave mirror is dipped inside the liquid of<br />

absolute refractive index 1.25. What will be the<br />

percentage change in its focal length.<br />

7. If nuclear density d ∝ A n , where A is the atomic<br />

number then write the value of n.<br />

8. Why standard resistors are made of alloys.<br />

9. Name the quantities whose SI units are given below :<br />

1. V – m 2. C-m<br />

out of the two also name the vector quantity.<br />

10. A transistor is shown in figure.<br />

3. Write the name of a compound semiconductor.<br />

4. If one of the slit get closed in Young's Double slit<br />

experiment then fringe pattern will be observed or<br />

not on the screen.<br />

5. Write one of the use of Zener Diode.<br />

6. Name the experiment which proves the Dual Nature<br />

of electron.<br />

+2V<br />

+1V +3V<br />

(i) Name the type of transistor<br />

. (ii) Is the transistor is properly biased.<br />

11. A time variant current is given -<br />

i(t) = 1 + 3 2 sin (314 t + 30º)<br />

Find its root mean square value.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 69 DECEMBER 2009


12. A metallic conductor of non-uniform cross-sectional<br />

area is shown in figure.<br />

i<br />

a<br />

p 1 p 2 p 3<br />

(i) Out of p 1 , p 2 , and p 3 at which point the drift speed<br />

of the electron is maximum.<br />

(ii) Out of p 1 , p 2 and p 3 at which point the current<br />

density is minimum.<br />

13. Stopping potential versus freq. of the incident light<br />

graph is shown in figure for metal-1 and metal-2<br />

metal-1 metal-2<br />

V 0<br />

θ 1<br />

(i) Which metal will have the higher value of<br />

threshold wavelength.<br />

(ii) Is θ 1 = θ 2 if yes then why ?<br />

14. Draw the circuit diagram for finding the internal<br />

resistance of the cell using potentiometer.<br />

15. (i) Define angle of Dip.<br />

(ii) What is the value of angle of Dip at a place on<br />

earth where Horizontal component and vertical<br />

component of earth magnetic field are equal.<br />

16. (i) State Kirchhoff's current law.<br />

(ii) Find the potential difference across the 2 ohm<br />

resistance for the given circuit diagram.<br />

4A 1Ω 2Ω<br />

θ 2<br />

b<br />

υ<br />

18. (i) Write the order of colors in secondary rainbow.<br />

(ii) Why sun appears reddish at the time of sunrise<br />

and sunset.<br />

19. The charges on the capacitors are Q a , Q b and Q c then<br />

calculate -<br />

1µF<br />

Q a<br />

12µF<br />

30V<br />

Q b<br />

Q c<br />

key-K<br />

3µF<br />

(i) Ratio of energy stored in 1 µF and 3 µF capacitor.<br />

(ii) Potential difference across 12 µF capacitor<br />

(iii) Energy supplied by the battery.<br />

20. (i) A uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T exist in the<br />

given solenoid. If an electron is projected along the<br />

axis of solenoid from a towards b with the speed of<br />

3 × 10 2 m/s then find the Lorentz force working on<br />

electron.<br />

i<br />

a<br />

(ii) When the current flows through the metallic<br />

spring why it get shrinked.<br />

21. (i) For the given circuit diagram find the position of<br />

the null point.<br />

5Ω 10 Ω<br />

b<br />

3Ω<br />

A<br />

B<br />

1A<br />

G<br />

100 cm<br />

17. (i) State Lenz's law.<br />

(ii) If the current i increases then what will be the<br />

direction of induced current in the circular coil for the<br />

given figure.<br />

V bb<br />

R h<br />

Key-k<br />

Rheostat<br />

(ii) For the given figure draw truth table.<br />

A<br />

i<br />

b<br />

B<br />

Y<br />

a<br />

a >> b<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 70 DECEMBER 2009


22. (i) State Brewster's law for polarization .<br />

(ii) If the Brewster's angle for the given pair of<br />

medium is i p then express the critical angle for the<br />

same pair of media in terms of i p .<br />

(iii) If the lens is made of medium-2 and placed in<br />

medium-1. If the absolute refractive Index of<br />

medium-2 is µ 2 and of medium-1 is µ 1 then µ 2 > µ 1 .<br />

Is it correct or not.<br />

(iii) Where to put the proton that it will have<br />

maximum force on it.<br />

27. For the given configuration find the -<br />

–2q<br />

2a<br />

2a<br />

Incident rays<br />

Medium-1<br />

Refracted rays<br />

Medium -2<br />

Medium-1<br />

+q<br />

+q<br />

2a<br />

(i) Dipole moment of the system.<br />

(ii) Electric potential energy of the system.<br />

23. What is the need of Modulation in communication<br />

system. Draw the shapes of signal, carrier wave and<br />

amplitude Modulated wave.<br />

24. How a Galvanometer can be converted into Ammeter<br />

explain it by drawing the circuit diagram.<br />

⎛ i ⎞<br />

Prove that S = ⎜<br />

g<br />

⎟ G<br />

⎝ i − i g ⎠<br />

G = Resistance of Galvanometer coil<br />

S = value of shunt<br />

i g = Full scale deflection current for Galvanometer<br />

i = Range of Ammeter.<br />

25. (i) Find the equivalent resistance between A and B<br />

for given fig.<br />

R<br />

A<br />

R<br />

R R<br />

R<br />

R R B<br />

(ii) α is the symbol for the temperature coefficient of<br />

resistivity for the given material. If α → 0 then the<br />

material will be copper or constantan ?<br />

26. (i) What is the angle between electric field line and<br />

equi-potential surface.<br />

(ii) If E a , E b and E c are the electric field intensities at<br />

points a, b and c respectively, where to put a proton<br />

that it will have the maximum electric potential<br />

energy.<br />

a<br />

b<br />

c<br />

28. Draw the circuit diagram for common emitter<br />

transistor amplifier. Explain its working. What is the<br />

phase difference between input and output voltage in<br />

case of common emitter transistor amplifier.<br />

29. Explain construction and working of cyclotron. Why<br />

cyclotron can not be used to accelerate the electrons.<br />

30. State Ampere's circuital law. Using Ampere's<br />

circuital law find the magnetic field at the axis of the<br />

long solenoid.<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

1. Give the IUPAC name of the organic compound<br />

(CH 3 ) 2 C = CH – C – CH 3 .<br />

||<br />

O<br />

2. Complete the following reaction :<br />

CH 3 – CH 2 – CH = CH 2 + HCl → …..<br />

3. State a use for the enzyme streptokinase in medicine.<br />

4. What is copolymerization ?<br />

5. Which type of a metal can be used in cathodic<br />

protection of iron against rusting ?<br />

6. Why is the bond dissociation energy of fluorine<br />

molecule less than that of chlorine molecule ?<br />

7. What is meant by inversion of sugar ?<br />

8. What are the types of lattice imperfections found in<br />

crystals ?<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 71 DECEMBER 2009


9. Describe the mechanism of the formation of diethyl<br />

ether from ethanol in the presence of concentrated<br />

sulphuric acid.<br />

10. Predict, giving reasons, the order of basicity of the<br />

following compounds in (i) gaseous phase and (ii) in<br />

aqueous solutions (CH 3 ) 3 N, (CH 3 ) 2 NH, CH 3 NH 2 ,<br />

NH 3 .<br />

11. Write names of monomer/s of the following polymers<br />

and classify them as addition or condensation<br />

polymers.<br />

(i) Teflon<br />

(ii) Bakelite<br />

(iii) Natural Rubber<br />

12. Give an example for each of the following reactions :<br />

(i) Kolbe’s reaction.<br />

(ii) Reimer-Tiemann reaction.<br />

13. Write one distinction test each for :<br />

(i) Ethyl alcohol and 2–propanol<br />

(ii) Acetaldeyde and acetone<br />

14. Distinguish between multimolecular and<br />

macromolecular colloids. Give one example of each<br />

type.<br />

15. Draw the structure of pyrophosphoric acid and how it<br />

is prepared.<br />

16. If E° for copper electrode is +0.34 V how will you<br />

calculate its emf value when the solution in contact<br />

with it is 0.1 M in copper ions ? How does emf for<br />

copper electrode change when concentration of Cu 2+<br />

ions in the solution is decreased ?<br />

17. Physical and chemical adsorptions respond<br />

differently to a rise in temperature. What is this<br />

difference and why is it so ?<br />

18. Using the valence bond approach, predict the shape<br />

and magnetic character of [Ni (CO) 4 ].<br />

(At No. of Ni = 28).<br />

19. Describe the following giving a chemical equation<br />

for each :<br />

(i) Markownikoff’s rule<br />

(ii) Hofmann Bromide Reaction<br />

20 (a) Write chemical equations and reaction conditions<br />

for the conversion of :<br />

(i) Ethene to ethanol<br />

(ii) Phenol to phenyl ethanoate<br />

(iii) Ethanal to 2-propanol<br />

21. Identify the substances A and B in each of the<br />

following sequences of reactions :<br />

(i) C 2 H 5 Br<br />

⎯<br />

alc ⎯<br />

. KOH<br />

Br<br />

⎯⎯<br />

→ A ⎯⎯→<br />

2 B<br />

NaNO2 HCl<br />

(ii) NH + Cu2 (CN)<br />

2<br />

⎯ 2<br />

⎯⎯⎯⎯→ A⎯ ⎯⎯ ⎯⎯ → B<br />

0ºC<br />

(iii) NH H 2 SO 4<br />

2<br />

⎯ ⎯⎯<br />

→ A<br />

Heat<br />

⎯ ⎯→ ⎯ B<br />

22. Give the electronic configuration of the<br />

(a) d-orbitals of Ti in [Ti (H 2 O) 6 ] 3– ion in an<br />

octahedral crystal field.<br />

(b) Why is this complex coloured ? Explain on the<br />

basis of distribution of electrons in the d-orbitals.<br />

23. State reasons for the following :<br />

(a) Rusting of iron is said to be an electrochemical<br />

phenomenon.<br />

(b) For a weak electrolyte, its molar conductance in<br />

dilute solutions increases sharply as its concentration<br />

in solution is decreased.<br />

24. Using the valence bond approach predict the shape<br />

and magnetic character of [Co (NH 3 ) 6 ] 3+ . (Atomic<br />

number of Co is 27).<br />

25. Explain the following :<br />

(a) F-centre<br />

(b) Schottky & Frenkel defect<br />

26. Account for the following :<br />

(i) Ferric hydroxide sol is positively charged.<br />

(ii) The extent of physical adsorption decreases with<br />

rise in temperature.<br />

(iii) A delta is formed at the point where the river<br />

enters the sea.<br />

27. Taking two examples of heterogeneous catalytic<br />

reactions, explain how a heterogeneous catalyst helps<br />

in the reaction.<br />

28. (a) An organic compound ‘A’ with molecular<br />

formula C 5 H 8 O 2 is reduced to n-pentane on treatment<br />

with Zn-Hg/HCl. ‘A’ forms a dioxime with<br />

hydroxylamine and gives a positive lodoform test and<br />

Tollen’s test. Identify the compound A and deduce<br />

its structure.<br />

(b) Write the chemical equations for the following<br />

conversions : (not more than 2 steps)<br />

(i) Ethyl benzene to benzene<br />

(ii) Acetaldehyde to butane – 1, 3–diol<br />

(iii) Acetone to propene<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 72 DECEMBER 2009


29. Describe how potassium dichromate is made from<br />

chromite ore and give the equations for the chemical<br />

reactions involved.<br />

Write balanced ionic equations for reacting ions to<br />

represent the action of acidified potassium<br />

dichromate solution on :<br />

(i) Potassium iodide solution<br />

(ii) Acidified ferrous sulphate solution<br />

Write two uses of potassium dichromate.<br />

30. Give appropriate reasons for each of the following<br />

observations :<br />

(i) Sulphur vapour exhibits some paramagnetic<br />

behaviour.<br />

(ii) Silicon has no allotropic form analogous to<br />

graphite.<br />

(iii) Of the noble gases only xenon is known to form<br />

real chemical compounds.<br />

(iv) Nitrogen shows only a little tendency for<br />

catenation, whereas phosphorus shows a clear<br />

tendency for catenation.<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Section A<br />

1. Show that the relation R in the set {1, 2, 3} is given<br />

by R = {(1, 2), (2, 1)} is symmetric.<br />

−1<br />

2. Evaluate : x.tan x dx.<br />

∫<br />

3. Find the differential equation of the family of curves<br />

given by- x 2 + y 2 = 2ax.<br />

→<br />

→<br />

8. If a = î + ĵ ; b = ĵ+<br />

kˆ ; c = kˆ + î find a unit vector<br />

in the direction of<br />

→<br />

→<br />

→<br />

→<br />

a + b+<br />

c .<br />

9. What is the angle between vector → aand<br />

magnitude 3 and 2 respectively.<br />

→<br />

bwith<br />

10. Find the direction cosines of a line which make equal<br />

angles with the co ordinate axes.<br />

Section B<br />

11. Consider f : N → N, g : N → N and h : N → R<br />

defined as f (x) = 2x, g (y) = 3y + 4 and h (z) = sin<br />

z ∀ x, y and z in N. Show the ho(gof) = (hog)of.<br />

12. Differentiate cot –1 ⎛1−<br />

x ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ w.r.t. x.<br />

⎝1+<br />

x ⎠<br />

13. Solve the differential equations :<br />

(1 + e 2x ) dy + e x (1 + y 2 ) dx = 0. Give that y = 1,<br />

when x = 0.<br />

or<br />

dy<br />

Solve the differential equation : x − y − 2x<br />

3 = 0<br />

dx<br />

π<br />

14. Evaluate :<br />

∫<br />

/ 4<br />

0<br />

or<br />

sin<br />

π / 4<br />

+<br />

Evaluate :<br />

∫<br />

log( 1<br />

0<br />

2x sin 3x<br />

dx.<br />

tan x)dx<br />

4. Find the principle value of tan –1 (–1).<br />

5. Find a matrix C such that 2A – B + C = 0<br />

⎡3<br />

1⎤<br />

⎡− 2 1⎤<br />

Where A = ⎢ ⎥ and B =<br />

⎣0<br />

2<br />

⎢ ⎥ ⎦ ⎣ 0 3 ⎦<br />

6. If A is a square matrix of order 3 such that<br />

| adj A | = 64, find | A |.<br />

7. Find the value of x if the matrix A =<br />

singular.<br />

⎡ 4<br />

⎢<br />

⎢<br />

3<br />

⎢⎣<br />

10<br />

3<br />

− 2<br />

−1<br />

5⎤<br />

7<br />

⎥<br />

⎥<br />

x⎥⎦<br />

is<br />

3x + 1<br />

15. Evaluate :<br />

∫<br />

dx .<br />

2<br />

2x − 2x + 3<br />

16. If x = a (θ – sin θ) and y = a (1 – cos θ),<br />

find<br />

d<br />

2<br />

dx<br />

y<br />

2<br />

at θ<br />

= 2<br />

π .<br />

17. Find the value of K so that the function,<br />

⎧Kx<br />

+ 1, if x ≤ π<br />

f (x) = ⎨<br />

⎩cos x , if x > π<br />

or<br />

⎪⎧<br />

3<br />

x + 3, if x ≠ 0<br />

Show that the function f (x) = ⎨<br />

⎪⎩ 1 , if x = 0<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 73 DECEMBER 2009


18. Solve for x :<br />

x < 1.<br />

19. If A =<br />

⎡4<br />

⎢<br />

⎢<br />

1<br />

⎢⎣<br />

2<br />

tan<br />

− 5<br />

− 3<br />

3<br />

⎛ x −1<br />

⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ + tan<br />

⎝ x − 2 ⎠<br />

⎛ x + 1 ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ = ;<br />

⎝ x + 2 ⎠ 4<br />

−1 −1<br />

π<br />

−11⎤<br />

1<br />

⎥<br />

⎥<br />

find A –1<br />

− 7 ⎥⎦<br />

or<br />

Using the properties of determinates prove that -<br />

a + x y z<br />

x<br />

x<br />

a + y<br />

y<br />

2<br />

z = a (a + x + y + z)<br />

a + z<br />

20. Find the distance of the point (2, 3, 4) from the plane<br />

3x + 2y + 2z + 5 = 0, measured parallel to the line<br />

x + 3 y − 2 z<br />

= =<br />

3 6 2<br />

21. If<br />

→<br />

a and<br />

→<br />

b are unit vectors and θ is the angle<br />

between them, then prove that cos<br />

θ 1 =<br />

2 2<br />

→<br />

+<br />

→<br />

22. A football match may be either won, drawn or lost by<br />

the host country team. So there are three ways of<br />

forecasting the result of any one match, one correct<br />

and two incorrect. Find the probability of forecasting<br />

at least three correct results for four matches.<br />

or<br />

A candidate has to reach the examination centre in<br />

time. Probabilities of him going by bus or scooter or<br />

3 1 3<br />

by other means of transport are , ,<br />

10 10 5<br />

respectively. The probability that he will be late is<br />

1 1 and respectively, if he travels by bus or scooter.<br />

4 3<br />

But he reaches in time if he uses any other mode of<br />

transport. He reached late at the center. Find the<br />

probability that he traveled by bus.<br />

π/<br />

2<br />

Section C<br />

cos x<br />

23. Evaluate :<br />

∫<br />

dx<br />

(1 + sin x)(2 + sin x)<br />

0<br />

a<br />

b<br />

24. Using integration, find the area of the circle<br />

x 2 +y 2 = 16, which is exterior to the parabola y 2 = 6x.<br />

or<br />

Find the area of the smaller region bounded by the<br />

2 2<br />

x y<br />

x y<br />

ellipse + = 1 and the line + = 1.<br />

2 2<br />

a b<br />

a b<br />

25. Show that a right circular cylinder which is open at<br />

the top, and has a given surface area, will have the<br />

greatest volume if its height is equal to the radius of<br />

its base.<br />

⎡1<br />

−1<br />

1 ⎤<br />

26. For A =<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎢<br />

2 1 − 3<br />

⎥<br />

, find A –1 and hence solve the<br />

⎢⎣<br />

1 1 1 ⎥⎦<br />

system of equations.<br />

x + 2y + z = 4<br />

– x + y + z = 0<br />

x – 3y + z = 2<br />

27. A letter is known to have come from either<br />

TATANAGAR or CALCUTTA. On the envelope<br />

just two consecutive letters TA are visible. What is<br />

the probability that the letter has come from-<br />

(i) TataNagar<br />

(ii) Calcutta<br />

or<br />

Find the probability distribution of the number of<br />

white balls drawn in a random draw of 3 balls<br />

without replacement from a bag containing 4 white<br />

and 6 red balls. Also find mean and variance of the<br />

distribution.<br />

28. Find the distance of the point (3, 4, 5) from the plane<br />

x + y + z = 2 measured parallel to the line 2x = y = z.<br />

29. Every gram of wheat provides 0.1 gm of proteins and<br />

0.25 gm of carbohydrates. The corresponding values<br />

for rice are 0.05 gm and 0.5 gm respectively. Wheat<br />

costs Rs. 4 per kg and rice Rs. 6 per kg. The<br />

minimum daily requirements of protein and<br />

carbohydrates for an average child are 50 gms and<br />

200 gms respectively. In what quantities should<br />

wheat and rice be mixed in the daily diet to provide<br />

minimum daily requirements of proteins and<br />

carbohydrates at minimum cost. Frame an L.P.P. and<br />

solve it graphically.<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 74 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge Test Series<br />

ANSWER KEY<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>- <strong>JEE</strong> <strong>2010</strong> (December issue)<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans B A B C A,B C,D A,B,D B,C A,B,C,D<br />

Ques 10 A → P,Q,R,S B → Q,P,Q,R C → P,Q,R,S D → P,Q,R,S<br />

Ques 11 A → Q B → R C → P D → S<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 3 2 5 2 6 2 1 1<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans D D D C D A,B,C B A,B,D B,C,D<br />

Ques 10 A → R B → Q,T C → P D → S<br />

Ques 11 A → Q,S B → R,S C → P,Q,T D → R,S<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 1 2 2 0 2 9 0 6<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans B C C C A,B,D A,C A,B,C,D A,D D<br />

Ques 10 A → Q B → R C → P D → S<br />

Ques 11 A → Q B → S C → P D → R<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 1 4 6 4 1 3 3 3<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>- <strong>JEE</strong> 2011 (December issue)<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans D B C D A,B,C,D A,C A,C,D A,B,C,D A,B,C,D<br />

Ques 10 A → Q B → S C → R D → P<br />

Ques 11 A → R B → P C → S D → Q<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 2 3 3 5 2 3 0 1<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans A B D C A,C,D A,B,D A,B,D C D<br />

Ques 10 A → R B → P,S,T C → Q D → P,T<br />

Ques 11 A → S B → R C → P D → Q<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 1 7 2 7 8 1 9 1<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />

Ans B C A C A,B,C,D A,B,C B,D A,B A,C<br />

Ques 10 A → S B → P C → Q D → R<br />

Ques 11 A → S B → R C → Q D → P<br />

Ques 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Ans 2 5 3 6 1 2 0 4<br />

XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 75 DECEMBER 2009


XtraEdge for <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 76 DECEMBER 2009

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!